JP7310504B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. Configurations that transition are known (eg, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-31031 A

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
display control means for performing control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operating means operable by a player, comprising an operated part movable in a predetermined direction by an operation of the player, and the operated part can be placed in a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operating means is not operated. and
an operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variable display;
The display control means advances the variable display according to the speed and amount of operation from the timing when the operation is performed on the operation means, and when the operation is completed and control to return the progress of the variable display to the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation proceeds without performing the operation.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine Perspective view showing a pachinko machine in an open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing a state in which the front block of the pachinko machine is removed front view of game board Back side perspective view of pachinko machine Back view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flowchart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing (A) is a front view showing a part of the pattern sheet, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the pattern sheet taken along line AA of FIG. 13(A). (A) to (C) are front views of the decorative pattern display device of the second embodiment, and (D) is a front view showing part of the pattern sheet corresponding to each pattern row. Front view of a decorative design display device in a modified example of the second embodiment (A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and (B) to (C) are front views of the decorative pattern display device of the third embodiment. Front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment (A) is a front view of the light-emitting decoration, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting decoration along line BB in FIG. 18(A). A screen diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed by the decorative pattern display device of the fifth embodiment. Schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing device provided in the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment. Schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of the pressing operation device according to the operation position FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation position of the pressing operation device and the reaction force to the pressing operation when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device; Front side perspective view of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment Schematic diagram for explaining the pressing device provided in the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment. (A) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the start winning of the special symbol occurs, (B) is a screen transition diagram for the pressing operation device during the non-game state Screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device when the push-in operation is performed Screen diagram showing an example of variable display and fixed display displayed on the decorative pattern display device in the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment In the pachinko machine of the eleventh embodiment, a screen diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the decorative symbol display device during the operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input. In the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, a screen diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the decorative symbol display device during the operable period in the variable display configured to enable operation input. Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining amount of the operable period and the state of the pressing operation device in the variable display configured to allow operation input. Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time of the variable display and the state of the pressing operation device Time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the variable display. Time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the variable display. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device is set to a plurality of types displaced from the initial position to different height positions as a trigger for the effect executed in the variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining control in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device is set to a plurality of types displaced from the initial position to different height positions as a trigger for the effect executed in the variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of types of control when the operation surface of the pressing operation device is pressed and then returned after the operation surface is lowered once, as an effect executed in the variable display;

With respect to the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a pinball gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described, and then modifications and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, structural configuration, electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, mainly referring to FIGS. 1 to 9, the structure of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 showing the closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. showing. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6 .

The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, as shown in FIGS. Displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100 . The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113 and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in a game arcade, and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). It should be noted that the outer frame 101 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 100, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and the main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 A configuration in which a part of the supporting mechanism for supporting and the locking mechanism for locking the main body portion may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 rotates at one end (left side) in the horizontal direction when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation distal end side.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, at the upper and lower ends of the outer frame 101 so as to be separated from each other, as shown in FIG. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, a shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft portion is provided in a shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. is inserted, it is configured to be rotatable. The configuration that allows the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 to rotate is not limited to the configuration described above. Other configurations are also possible.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removing operation, and the body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. It is removably attached to the For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removing operation of releasing the intermediate block 103 from the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving it upwardly by a certain amount. be. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101. - 特許庁

The front block 102 is arranged to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 so as to be rotatable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and can be removed by a predetermined removal operation. configured as possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are held together by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable backward relative to the intermediate block 103. And, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detachment operation.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operation mechanism operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102 .

As a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, when an operation key (not shown) is rotated to the right, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated. As a result, the engaging portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 are disengaged, and the intermediate block 103 enters an openable/closable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, when the key cylinder 141 is turned to the left by a predetermined operation key, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is actuated. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 are disengaged, and the front block 102 enters an openable/closable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening/closing regulation mechanism that regulates the opening/closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103 . The rear block opening/closing regulation mechanism allows the rear block 104 to switch between a state in which opening/closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening/closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation. It is said that

For example, as shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening/closing regulation mechanism is composed of two opening/closing regulation portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing regulation portion 150C provided in the rear block 104. . Rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated are provided on these three opening/closing regulating portions 150A to 150C. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C are rotated to change the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap front and back in the closed state of the rear block 104, thereby changing the opening/closing prohibition posture corresponding to the opening/closing prohibition state. , and an openable/closable posture corresponding to the openable/closable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are placed in the openable/closable posture, the respective rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the openable/closable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. FIG. As for the opening/closing prohibition posture and the opening/closing permission posture, the opening/closing prohibition state and the opening/closing permission state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. Alternatively, it may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to changes in posture when constituent members of each device move between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part thereof are formed on the rear block 104 when the rear block 104 is in the open/close prohibited state, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed on the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open/close permitting posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby improving security. is raised.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism for restricting movement of game balls from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 . 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow restriction piece 161 provided on the intermediate block 103 and a restriction change section 162 provided on the front block 102, A flow restricting piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In a state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restricting piece 161 is in a movement-permitting state that allows the game ball to flow down. The change portion 162 presses and pushes the intermediate block 103 rearward. The flow restricting piece 161 is arranged rearwardly with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement permitting state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is permitted.

On the other hand, in a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (an open state of the front block 102), the pressure of the flow restriction piece 161 by the restriction changing portion 162 is released, and compared to the closed state of the front block 102, As a result, the flow restricting piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102 to prohibit movement. The flow restricting piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement-prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing downstream. Thereby, movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 has, for example, the intermediate block 103 closed to the outer frame 101 at the lower end on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side in rear view). An open/close detection switch 108 is provided for detecting whether or not the intermediate block 103 is open or closed, and as shown in FIG. An open/close detection switch 109 is provided for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed with respect to 103 .

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, intermediate block 103, and rear block 104 will be described in order.

The front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as a front decoration means to be used. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201 . On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to the When the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decoration 210 are combined, an opening 210A is formed through a wide range in the front-rear direction except for the outer peripheral portion where the front decoration 210 is attached. The intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located behind the front block 102 is visible to the player through the opening 210A.

1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls and a shooting operation device 250 operated by a player to shoot the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

1 and 5, the front block 102 includes, as a part of the front decoration 210, an opening peripheral edge portion 211 that surrounds the peripheral edge of the opening 210A, and an opening protruding forward below the opening 210A. , a lower protrusion 218 positioned below the upper protrusion 217 and protruding forward, and an upper protrusion 217 and a lower protrusion on the right side of the lower protrusion 218 A flat portion 219 is formed on the back side of 218 and is composed of a generally flat area on which the firing operation device 250 is arranged. A main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217 , and an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218 .

The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that closes the opening 210A penetrating in the front-rear direction in a state in which the base frame 201 and the front decoration body 210 are combined and allows the rear side to be visually recognized. For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the central panel 220 includes a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light transmissive panel frame 221 fitted in the front side of the panel frame 221. and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 on the rear side of the panel frame 221 with a predetermined gap. there is

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls obtained as the game progresses and game balls rented from the game arcade. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage portion 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The reservoir 231 includes an inlet 231A through which game balls flow into the reservoir 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, an outlet (not shown) through which game balls flow out from the reservoir 231 into the pachinko machine 100, and an outlet (not shown) formed upstream from the outlet. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage part 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加The ball extraction mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outflow port and the discharge port.

Game balls acquired in accordance with the progress of the game and game balls rented out in response to a renting operation on a renting operation device 292, which will be described later, flow into the storage section 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. The reservoir 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, through which game balls owned by the player are manually inserted or game balls rented out at the game arcade are supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the reservoir 231 are aligned in a line and guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1). When the ball extraction operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball extraction operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the later-described launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) through the outflow port. On the other hand, when the ball extraction operation is performed on the ball extraction operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the ejection port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes a storage portion 241 having inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) for game balls, and a discharge port 241B. and a ball removing operation member 242 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243. Game balls and the like acquired as the game progresses mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage section 231 is full, they flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A. In addition, the game ball flows into the storage section 241 from the storage section 231 through the inlet 241C in response to the ball extraction operation on the ball extraction operation member 232 as well.

The bottom surface of the reservoir 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the release port 241B is opened by a ball extraction operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball extraction operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball extraction operation on the ball extraction operation member 242, the ball extraction operation member 242 is kept in its open state until the return operation (for example, pressing operation again) is performed. maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241. FIG.

1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decoration 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and the firing handle 252. It also includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that disables the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the player's operation. When the player rotates the shooting handle 252, game balls are ejected from the shooting device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or if the firing stop switch 255 is operated to disable the firing operation, the firing handle 252 is rotated. However, no game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 .

Frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102 . The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decoration 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201 . As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left edge portion 211B and an upper right edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left edge portion. A left edge portion 211D located below 211B and a right edge portion 211E located below the upper right edge portion 211C are provided as light emitting portions, and frame light emission corresponding to each light emitting portion is provided. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light-emitting devices 271 to 275 are an upper center frame light-emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light-emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, and an upper right frame light-emitting device corresponding to the upper right edge 211C. A device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 includes one or more light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components are integrated and electrically connected. and a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left sound output port 211F and an upper right sound output port 211G above the opening peripheral portion 211, and these upper left sound output ports 211F are provided. An upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be positioned inward (rearward) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration 210 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290 on the right side of the upper surface of the upper projecting portion 217, for example. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the balance of banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into card units (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When the lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit and the numerical values corresponding to the amounts thereof are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are rented from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are rented. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the banknote equivalent corresponding to the balance or a card on which the balance is recorded is returned from the card unit in response to the return operation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform an input operation other than the shooting operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a pressing operation device 261 capable of pressing operation, a rotary operation device 262 capable of rotating operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of upward, downward, leftward, and rightward direction operations. With these operation devices 261 to 263, the effect selection operation for selecting the effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, the device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device that executes the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or the operation related to the player A performance setting operation or the like can be executed by inputting information to enable the performance of the pachinko machine 100 to be executed according to the previous game, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game parlor as required. It is said that It should be noted that the input operation unit that the player touches in the input operation device 260 (for example, the annular rotary operation unit in the rotary operation device 262) is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by input operation unit driving means such as a motor or solenoid. Operation such as vibration is preferably configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the presentation accompanying the input operation, such as positively prompting the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 is integrated. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301 .

3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, a base frame A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and game balls on the game board 400. A shooting device 330 (see FIG. 3) that shoots, a main controller 370 (see FIG. 4) that is mounted on the back side of the game board 400 and controls the progress of the game in general, and based on commands from the main controller 370 It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game effects and state notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 has a guide passage portion 301A formed therein with a guide passage for guiding a game ball released from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102; A plurality of wires (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wires inserted through the opening 301B are connected to various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, the frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) and devices provided on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, the main controller 370 and the sub controller 390). Including wiring, the signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base 401 having through holes such as a discharge port 401A through which game balls can pass back and forth, and an outer rail smoothly curving from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402 , an inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401 , a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the tip of the upper left side of the inner rail 403 , and a tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 402 . and an attached anti-recoil member 405 . The outer rail 402 guides a game ball launched from a launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents a game ball once released into the game area from a shooting path 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing each other in parallel from returning to the shooting path 401B. The anti-recoil member 405 has a shock-absorbing property that prevents a game ball from rebounding to the left after passing through the upper center of the game board 400 and returning to the left. However, it is made of a material such as damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage 163 is formed in the lower rear portion of the front block 102 . There is a gap between the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the launcher 330 to the direction of the launch path 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launcher 330 without exceeding the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning through the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) through the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball progressing beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area, and moves (flows down) while falling by its own weight within the game area. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is partitioned into a shape in which the majority of the area has a front-to-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area has an outer peripheral portion defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is substantially planarly defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially planarly defined by the base 401 of the game board 400. are divided into Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the shooting device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially feeds the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the shooting position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (see FIG. 10). ), a shooting mechanism 333 that shoots a game ball placed at the shooting position, a shooting solenoid 334 that drives the shooting mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball shot from the shooting mechanism 333 on the game board 400. and a guide member 335 that guides into the firing passageway 401B. Firing device 330 operates according to the firing operation of firing operation device 250 as described above, and the firing force is adjusted by changing the drive control of firing solenoid 334 in accordance with the firing operation of firing operation device 250 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a two-piece board case 371 that accommodates the main control board 920. As shown in FIG. The main control board 920 is housed inside a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Also, the main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400 . Specifically, an attachment portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400 , and the main controller 370 is attached to the attachment portion 372 . As a result, not only the back side (surface side) of the main control device 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 can be attached to the game board 400 by rotating the mounting portion 372. It is supposed that it can be easily checked while it is attached. The main controller 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main controller 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-controller 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a two-piece structure that accommodates the sub-control board 940 . The sub-control board 940 is, for example, housed inside a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, similar to the main control board 920 . Installed on the back side.

Various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will now be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 7, an example of the decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 479 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 7 , the game board 400 includes a base 401 , flow-changing members such as nails 411 and windmills 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of the game ball, and a center ball arranged substantially in the center of the base 401 . The structure 420, the starting device related to the first special symbol arranged on the lower side of the central structure 420 (specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B), and the center A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) related to the second special symbol arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420, and a large winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432 , 434 (specifically, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right start winning device 432, and the game board 400 A role interlocking operating device 435 arranged on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434, and a general winning device 439A arranged on both left and right sides of the lower middle start winning device 431B. , 439B.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting passage of game balls corresponding to the above-described upper middle start winning device 431A (see FIG. 10). Entry of a game ball into a predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning prize device 431A, a middle start winning prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning prize device 431B (lower Side center start winning switch 441B), right start winning switch 442 for detecting game balls entering right start winning device 432, lower big winning switch 443 for detecting game balls entering lower big winning device 433, upper big winning device An upper big winning switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered the 434, a combination operation switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered the combination operation device 435, a starting switch 446 that detects a game ball that has entered the starting device 436, and a bottom switch. A non-specific path switch 447 for detecting a game ball entering a non-specific path (not shown) formed inside the big winning device 433, and a specific path (not shown) formed inside the lower big winning device 433 The game board 400 is provided with a specific passage switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered the game board 400, general winning switches 449A and 449B for detecting game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors (see FIG. 10) for fraud prevention, and can detect abnormalities occurring in the pachinko machine 100 . For example, a magnetic sensor 491 , a vibration sensor 492 , a radio wave sensor 493 and the like are installed on the game board 400 .

A game ball entrance portion of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes a ball entrance, and a game ball entering each ball entrance is released into the game area. Each winning device, specifically, upper middle start winning device 431A, lower middle start winning device 431B, right start winning device 432, lower big winning device 433, upper big winning device 434, and general winning device 439A, 439B The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a prize winning opening, and the game balls entering each winning opening are guided to a collection discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. . In addition, the game balls that have not entered the respective winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each prize winning device may be configured separately from other prize winning devices, or a device in which two or more prize winning devices (for example, upper middle start prize device 431A and lower middle start prize device 431B) are integrated. In addition, the starting device such as the upper middle start winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game ball enters. It may be a ball entrance through which the ball is released to the game area again without being paid out.

Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B related to the first special symbol, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B enter without changing the entry probability of the game ball to them. The played game ball is guided to the back side of the substrate 401. - 特許庁In addition, the right starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball into its interior. In addition, the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball need not be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, instead, or in addition, the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device It may be provided in one or more of 439A and 439B. Also, the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball may be constituted by driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol includes a right entry regulation mechanism 452 that changes the probability of entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the right entry regulation mechanism. 452 and a right entry restricting solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10). The right entry restricting mechanism 452 has two movable pieces driven by a right entry restricting solenoid 462. When the right entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces are positioned at the entrance (winning entrance). ), the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry permitting posture, the two movable pieces A game ball can enter the right start winning device 432 by taking an arrangement such that the interval between the parts is enlarged. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 is a lottery based on the detection of the game ball entering the starting device 436 according to the normal symbol by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). In accordance with the drive by the restricting solenoid 462, the posture is shifted to the entry permitting posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower prize winning device 433 includes a lower entry regulation mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of game balls into the interior thereof by shifting between an entry-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture, and a lower entry regulation mechanism. A game ball that has entered the lower big prize winning device 433 is moved to a non-specific passage or a specific passage by the downward entry regulation solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guided posture and the guided posture. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing the posture of the distribution mechanism and switching the guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower special prize device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (prize opening) so that the game ball cannot enter the lower special prize device 433. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 is in the entry permitting posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 opens the entry port so that the game ball can enter the lower big winning device 433 . In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guiding posture in which it projects forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in a guiding posture in which it retreats backward. is guided to a specific passage. The specific path, the non-specific path, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific path, the player is given an advantageous game state as a privilege. .

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper big prize device 434 includes an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates entry of game balls into the device by shifting between an entry-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture, and an upper entry regulation mechanism. An upward entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper big winning device 434, but the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 is the entry permitting posture, the game ball can enter the upper big winning device 434 by the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 opening the entry port.

In addition, as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of a game ball into the right entry regulation mechanism 452 or the like, the entry-allowed attitude and the entry-prohibited attitude can be configured by configuring each mechanism and forming a winning opening (or a ball entrance) of each device. At least one of the position and orientation of the operating member is different according to each posture, corresponding to the change in the posture of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter. Good to have. In addition, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of a game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to make the state in which the game ball cannot enter the normal state. In the state, the configuration may be such that the attitude of the operating member changes to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower big prize winning device 433 and the upper big prize winning device 434 when winning the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery"), or the game ball that entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (hereinafter also referred to as "second special symbol lottery"), at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 or the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 assumes the entry permitting posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guidance posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined period of time from the shift of the downward entry regulation mechanism 453 to the entry-permitting posture, and further switches to the guidance posture after a predetermined period of time from the shift to the guidance posture. Upon deactivation of solenoid 465, it returns to the non-guiding position.

The combination operation device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for starting the operation of the lower special prize winning device 433 and the upper special prize winning device 434 . After winning the jackpot lottery, either the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 starts to operate on the condition that the game ball passes through the combination operation device 435 . Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, the player can start the special game state at his/her intended timing. It should be noted that it is not necessarily required that either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 starts to operate under the condition that the game ball passes through the combination operation device 435. In addition, either the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 may start to operate when a predetermined time elapses.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 for displaying symbol variations and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times the game is held. A display device having a plurality of light-emitting portions is provided in the lower left portion corresponding to a portion of the game board 400 . The plurality of light-emitting units are divided in advance into light-emitting regions corresponding to respective devices, and the state of each device is displayed by the light-emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, along with the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is variably displayed, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 relating to special symbols and a second special symbol lottery which variably displays the second special symbol or confirms and displays the second special symbol with a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 relating to special symbols, a special symbol suspension display device 476 displaying the number of suspensions of unit games relating to the first special symbol, and a special symbol suspension displaying the number of suspensions of unit games relating to the second special symbol. A display 477 is provided. The unit game right related to the first special symbol and the unit game right related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is one game that is executed based on one start winning prize, and a lottery determination performed based on one start winning prize and a lottery based on the win or failure determination. A series of games including the start and end of variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball entering the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning switch Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, assuming that the game ball entering the right starting winning device 432 is detected by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10) Also, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts (combination of light emitting states including light emitting colors (light off, light on, blinking)). The special design reservation display device 476 related to the first special design and the special design reservation display device 477 related to the second special design are the number of times of reservation by combining the light emitting state (light off, lighting, blinking) of the two single color light emitting parts. indicate.

In addition, on the game board 400, a normal symbol display device 473 for variably displaying the normal symbols along with the normal symbol lottery, or fixedly displaying the normal symbols with a stop symbol according to the lottery result, and a normal symbol display device 473 are provided. A normal symbol reservation display device 478 for displaying the number of times of reservation of right of unit game is provided. The right of the unit game related to normal symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal pattern is reserved up to the maximum number of times, even if the game ball entering the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, the right of the unit game related to the normal pattern is not added.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting parts and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). A normal pattern is represented by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emission portions. In addition, the normal symbol reservation display device 478 displays the number of times of reservation by a combination of light emitting states (extinguishing, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting portions.

Also, on the game board 400, so as to overlap behind the central structure 420, in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, or the decorative symbols are fixedly displayed. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided.

The decorative pattern display device 479 has three pattern display areas 479A, 479B and 479C arranged in the horizontal direction. All of the pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C are areas in which the decorative patterns are variably displayed or fixedly displayed. Of the pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C, the decorative designs displayed in the leftmost design display area 479A constitute the left design row, and the decorative designs displayed in the rightmost design display area 479B. constitutes the right symbol row. Further, the decorative designs displayed in the design display area 479C located between the design display areas 479A and 479B constitute the middle design row.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is configured as a reel device having three cylindrical reels (rotating bodies) arranged in the horizontal direction. Each reel of the reel device is independently rotatable by a motor (not shown) controlled by the sub-control board 940 .

Each cylindrical reel that constitutes the reel device includes a cylindrical main body (hereinafter also referred to as “reel main body”) made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, transparent resin) and an outer peripheral surface of the reel main body. and a belt-shaped pattern sheet 601 (see FIG. 13) attached along the circumferential direction of the . The pattern sheet 601 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction in a predetermined order.

The decorative pattern display device 479 rotates each reel to move a plurality of decorative patterns provided on the pattern sheet 601 from top to bottom or in the opposite direction in each of the pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C ( scroll). Thereby, the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 479 is realized. The decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily have to be composed of a plurality of reels, and may be composed of other devices such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying images.

The variable display and finalized display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 479 are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and finalized display of the first and second special symbols by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbols, more complex and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbols and the second special symbols. It should be noted that the variable display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol always start to fluctuate at exactly the same timing, or stop display as final display. It is not necessary, and a setting may be made in which fluctuation is started at approximately the same timing while providing a slight time difference between each timing, and final display is performed at approximately the same timing.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures. Various lighting effects and status notification by lighting are executed.

Various game states and transitions between game states will now be described. The normal game state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state where the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). handle.

When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters a specific passage (internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not, the game state to be shifted after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the state where the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving state "Also referred to as "), and the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as "low probability state") gaming state ( (Also referred to as "time-saving game state" below). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific path during the special game state, it is a time-saving state, and a state in which the winning probability of the big win in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. (hereinafter also referred to as "high probability state") to a game state (hereinafter also referred to as "variable probability game state").

The time saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but then returns to the normal game state. Also, the variable probability game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal game state.

It should be noted that the transition between the game state and the game state does not necessarily have to be the above-described configuration. At least one may be configured, a configuration further including a game state different from each of the game states described above, or a configuration in which transitions between game states are performed under conditions different from the conditions described above may be used.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number, a jackpot pattern random number, a stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states are generated. When the game ball entering either the starting winning device 431A or 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by one of the medium starting winning switches 441A or 441B (see FIG. 10), the starting winning of the first special symbol becomes. If the right to play the unit game related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of starting winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920 .

The unit game based on the random number obtained based on the start winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. is not reserved, it begins immediately after storing those random numbers. Also, even if it is not in the special game state, during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or when the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved After the completion of the unit game related to all the reserved special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) before the current winning, the unit game based on the current start winning is started. When each random number is acquired based on the starting prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game based on the random number is all pending before this starting prize after the special game state. It is started after the unit game related to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game based on the random number obtained based on the start winning of the first special symbol is started after all the unit games related to the second special symbol are completed. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol after the starting winning of this time, the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed with priority over the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in order of the starting winning. It may be a configuration in which the unit game superiority control is executed, and it may be a configuration in which the two special symbols are not alternative and can be varied at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the starting prize of the first special symbol, a stop symbol ( The type of jackpot pattern) is determined. The types of stop symbols correspond to the types of jackpots. For example, the number of rounds corresponding to the number of times that the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds), A plurality of types of big wins are set corresponding to the types of game states such as the game state to be shifted after the special game state (whether to shift to the variable probability game state or not), and a big win pattern is set for each type. When a big win is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a losing symbol different from the big winning symbol is set as a stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved, the first special The variation display time of the pattern is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is selected. Variation patterns of decorative symbols are broadly classified into variable patterns in which ready-to-win display is performed before the decorative symbols corresponding to the stop symbols (jackpot or losing symbols) related to the first special symbols are confirmed and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "reach Also referred to as "variation pattern"), and a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win display is not performed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the case where the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a losing symbol is displayed.

In addition, "ready-to-win display" refers to each symbol row (for example, The combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed in the left and right symbol rows) satisfies the conditions for becoming a jackpot symbol, and the remaining symbol rows (for example, the middle symbol row) where the variable display is continued thereafter. This is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the symbol will be a big hit depending on the display result (that is, the stopped symbol) when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The reach display includes normal reach, which is a reach display with a relatively short fluctuation display time (for example, approximately 25 seconds to approximately 30 seconds), and reach display with a fluctuation display time longer than normal reach (for example, approximately 60 seconds to approximately 180 seconds). and super reach. The types of reach display are not limited to two types, normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including special reach, which is a reach display with variable display time longer than super reach.

After the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display time is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and The variable display (variable effect) of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 479 is started, and the variable display by a constant pattern is continued over the variable display time for the first special design, and the decorative design is varied. The variable display is continued according to the variable pattern over the display time. After that, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol continues at least for a predetermined fixed period of time.

When the stop symbol associated with the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed. In the special game state, the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 of the lower big winning device 433 and the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 of the upper big winning device 433 take the entry permitting posture for a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big win. . When a predetermined number (for example, 8 pieces) of game balls are detected by the big winning switches 443 and 444, or a predetermined maximum When the entry permissible time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after a predetermined entry prohibition time has passed, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the entry permitting posture again. This entry control operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

Only one of the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 takes an entry permitting posture during the special game state. ), one of them shifts to the initial approach permitting posture. Also, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, it shifts to the time-saving game state or probability variable game state.

In various game states, when the game ball entering the right starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting winning switch 442, the second special symbol starts winning. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired, and the unit game based on this starting winning is executed. be done. In addition, determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, determination of the variation display time of the second special symbol, selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display time, execution of variation display, and game state The transition control and the like are executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol.

In various game states, when the game ball entering the starting device 436 is detected by the starting switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal design is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal design is acquired. and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920 . At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the normal design, immediately after the storage, the unit game related to the acquired normal design is started. On the other hand, if it is during the unit game related to the normal symbol, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is finished.

In the unit game relating to the normal symbols, it is determined whether or not the game is won based on the value of the winning random number. On the other hand, when the player does not win the normal symbol lottery, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stop symbol. After the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern display device 473 starts the variable display of the normal symbols, and in the non-time-saving state, the variable display by a fixed pattern is continued over a predetermined variable display time, and in the time-saving state. The variable display by a fixed pattern is continued over the predetermined|prescribed variable display time shorter than a non-time-saving state. With the lapse of a predetermined time corresponding to the game state, the stop symbols related to the normal symbols are fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol associated with the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry permitting posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when winning in a non-time-saving state (normal game state and special game state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry over a predetermined maximum entry allowed time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) state, and in the case of winning in the time-saving state (time-saving gaming state and probability variable gaming state), the right start winning device 432 is longer than the case of the non-time-saving state. ) intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to the approach permitting posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. Also, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol of this time ends.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, it is necessary to win in the normal symbol lottery, and furthermore, the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 in the entry permission state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is the same as the winning probability in the time saving game state, but the staying time of the entry permission state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal game state (for example, approximately 0.1 second) is set extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal game state. is significantly smaller than the chance per unit time of receiving the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving gaming state or a variable probability gaming state, the chance per unit time of receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly greater than the opportunity per unit time of receiving the first special symbol lottery. .

Therefore, the player wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and then plays with the aim of shifting to the probability variable game state by entering the game ball into the specific passage in the subsequent special game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420 method) and a game method (right-handed game method) in which a game ball is mainly flowed down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. The player plays the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, and plays the game by the right-handed game method in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state. Further, since the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the right-handed game method is used even in the special game state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are rear perspective and rear views of the pachinko machine 100, respectively. Note that FIG. 8 omits the outer frame 101 for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is constructed by attaching other members and devices to a base 501. As shown in FIG. The base 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported on the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

The rear block 104 includes a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage part for storing game balls, and continuously rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one row. A tank rail 520 as a ball aligning part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part that guides game balls flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout and A payout device 540 for lending out game balls, and a guide serving as a ball guiding portion for guiding the game balls discharged from the payout device 540 downstream of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls the payout and lending of game balls by the payout device 540, and a power supply that converts external power into power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs it. A power supply and launch control device 570 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of game balls based on the launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920, and a payout control device 560. and a relay device 950 for relaying signals between the game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100 .

The base 501 is integrally molded of resin (eg, ABS resin) and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 positioned behind the base portion 502 . The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as an attached part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Moreover, the protective cover part 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103 . is sized to form a window for exposure to A large number of ventilation holes 503A are formed on the back surface of the protective cover section 503, and have a function of improving the heat radiation performance of the main controller 370 and the sub-controller 390. As shown in FIG.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container with an upward opening, and one longitudinal end of the game ball tank 510 is sequentially supplied with game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island facility. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 gently slopes in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls supplied to the game ball tank 510 move to the opening side by their own weight. In addition, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, so that the game ball is preferentially guided to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . In addition, an antistatic plate (not shown) made of metal is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap thereon. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510 . The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 forming a substantially gutter-shaped passage for game balls having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521 gradually increasing in height. It has a rectifying member 522 which has a top surface part whose height is lowered and rectifies the game balls flowing down the passage from the vertically overlapping height to the height of one stage gradually. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510 .

The case rail 530 is formed vertically so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and game balls from the tank rail 520 flow in. The case rail 530 is curved to the left and right and continues downward so that the game ball does not flow vigorously. Further, in the middle of the ball passage of the case rail 530, a blown ball detecting portion 539 for detecting blown ball is provided. A stored ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is built into the ball out detection unit 539, and the stored ball switch 591 causes a ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or its upstream side, and a game ball does not enter the case rail 530. Detect out-of-ball condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as driving means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). According to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are released to the downstream side. Passage of the released game balls through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game balls.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply/fire control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the substrate 501 so as to be located at the lower back surface side of the rear block 104. It is The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply/fire control device 570 can be used continuously even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the payout control board 930. The payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, leaves no trace of opening. It is housed inside a substrate case that is sealed so that it cannot be unsealed.

The power/launch control device 570 includes a power/launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power/launch control board 900. The power/launch control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. Secondly, it is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a rear setting switch 905 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100 . The back side setting switch 905 is a setting enable switch for activating a setting operation for setting the ball output rate of the pachinko machine 100 to one of a plurality of predetermined levels (for example, 6 levels or 9 levels). It is a conversion device.

A predetermined key (not shown) is inserted into the back setting switch 905 and rotated to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position) to change the setting of the ball output rate. can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (pressing the initialization switch 907 in this embodiment) in a state in which the setting change of the pitching rate is enabled in this way, the setting change of the pitching rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the put-out rate is effectively performed, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. In other words, it can be said that the setting change of the ball output rate by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is the setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit probability (in this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery Winning probability) and the probability variable continuation rate (in this embodiment, when moving to the special game state via the second special symbol lottery in the probability variable game state, the probability of moving to the probability variable game state after the special game state) It is possible to select one of 9 types of game modes with different combinations of . Therefore, when the setting change of the ball output rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special By changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability), the throwing rate is adjusted.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type with a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability variable continuation rate and the middle type with an intermediate initial hit probability and an intermediate probability variable continuation rate You can choose between a type and a bottom type with a significantly lower initial hit probability but a significantly higher probability variation continuation rate. Furthermore, in each of these types, the probability of the first hit of each type is subdivided into three stages (hereinafter also referred to as the probability setting state) that are smaller than the width of the first hit probability between each type, that is, It is possible to select a first-stage probability with the lowest first-hit probability among the three stages, a second-stage probability with the second-lowest first-hit probability, and a third-stage probability with the highest first-hit probability.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning in the upper and lower medium start prize devices 431A, 431B and the right start prize device 432 is smaller than in other types, but the number of prize balls in the lower big prize device 433 and the upper big prize prize device 434 is won. The number of prize balls associated with is higher than other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 431A, 431B and the right starting winning device 432 is larger than in other types, but the number of winning balls to the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 is larger than that of the other types. The number of prize balls associated with is less than other types.

Here, the same number of prize balls may be set for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to determine from the number of winning balls whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type. can be added.

In addition, the profit rate for the player changes according to the stage of the probability setting state for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same regardless of the type The profit margins for the players are set substantially the same. Therefore, even if the setting of the probability is changed by changing the type, it is easy to predict the profits earned by the game hall per a certain period (for example, one day), and the management of the game hall can be facilitated.

In addition, the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the ball output rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the variable probability entry rate as described above. It may be either the inrush rate. In addition, lottery probability other than the first hit probability and the probability variation entry rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery And the probability that a small hit is selected in (in this embodiment, the rate of entry into the probability variable gaming state via winning in the second special symbol lottery) and the probability variable gaming state that has moved after the special game state (For example, the probability that the end of the probability variation gaming state is selected in the falling lottery performed each time the variable display of the symbols is executed during the probability variation gaming state) may be such as each of these game modes may be a combination of two or more of

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905 . When the setting of the put-out rate (the setting of the game mode) is effectively changed by operating the back setting switch 905, setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. . The setting display information is composed of a combination of alphabetic characters representing the type and numbers representing the probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type, middle type, and bottom type are represented by letters "T," "M," and "B," respectively. Further, the probability setting state of each type is represented by "1" for the first stage probability, "2" for the second stage probability, and "3" for the third stage probability.

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "T1" in the case of the top type game mode with the first stage probability, and in the case of the middle type game mode with the third stage probability. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "B2" in the case of the bottom type second stage probability game mode.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply/launch control board 900, a power monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, a sub control board 940, and the like. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Below, each of these main control circuit devices is described in detail.

The power supply/emission control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), 330 and a signal relay unit 903 for relaying an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 .

The power supply unit 901 receives external power (for example, 24 volts AC) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal power (for example, 24 volts direct current), and generates various types of power from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is driving voltage (for example, DC 12 volts) power for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, driving various switches, and executing control processing. It includes control voltage power (for example, DC 5 volts) power for backup, backup voltage power for retaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various power generated from internal power to the power monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the power monitoring board 910 . The main control board 920 is supplied with driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910 . Electric power of driving voltage and control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930 . The power of the drive voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940 . Electric power of the drive voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the launch control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 .

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, external power supply is stopped. By turning off the power switch 909 or by removing the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown), the pachinko machine is turned on. A state in which the supply of power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped and a state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped are collectively referred to as a "power failure state."

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output power of the control voltage for a predetermined period of time even after transition to a power failure state. This allows the main control board 920 to save the state and end the control so that the current control state can be restored.

The firing control unit 902 controls driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920 . It should be noted that the ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping firing is turned on. On condition that it is not operated, the firing control section 902 outputs an on-state firing permission signal to the main control board 920 . Also, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feeding solenoid control signal to the firing control section 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the on-state ball feed control signal, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the on-state firing solenoid control signal and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, game balls are sequentially shot from the shooting device 330 with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the ON state initialization signal. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay section 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. A configuration in which the initialization switch 907 is housed in the substrate case 371 may be employed, thereby suppressing unauthorized signal input targeting the section in which the signal is transmitted.

In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receives the low-speed payout signal and controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (payout The payout speed of game balls from the device 540) is reduced. In addition, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the off-state ball overflow signal, and the payout control board 930 that receives the high-speed payout signal changes the rotational speed of the payout motor 542. speed up.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a rear setting switch 905 and a setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay section 903 . The signal relay unit 903 relays an on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 permits the change of the game mode in response to receiving the setting signal of the ON state from the rear setting switch 905 . Also, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906 . The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

The power monitoring board 910 is a power monitoring unit 911 that monitors the state of power supply from the power/launch control board 900, and the power supply and transmission of various signals between the power/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920. and a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to a power failure state, and monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the state in which the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that there is a power outage, and an on-state power outage signal is output to the main control board 920 . The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100 . The main control board 920 is mounted with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data to be executed by the CPU, and temporarily storing various data when executing the control program. etc., and a RAM (not shown). Various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generator circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. there is The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured so that internal data can be maintained (backed up) by the power supply of the backup voltage from the power supply/launch control board 900 even after the transition to the power outage state.

The payout control board 930 controls the game ball payout operation by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the game ball lending operation by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290 . The payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, includes a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown) and a RAM (not shown), an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer, and a timer circuit. (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generator circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown).

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. , the open/close detection switches 108, 109, the stored ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to the one-way information Connected for outgoing communication only. In addition, the RAM of the payout control board 930, like the RAM of the main control board 920, may be configured to have a backup function that allows internal data to be maintained for a certain period of time in a power failure state, or the RAM of the main control board 920 , the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls operations of various production devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, etc., based on instructions from the main control board 920 . The sub control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to enable information communication. , is connected to the input operation device 260 so that information can be communicated bidirectionally, and to the decorative pattern display device 479 and the like, it is connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processing>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 can be broadly divided into the main processing that is started upon recovery from a power failure state, and the main processing that is interrupted periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2ms (milliseconds)) and executed. and timer interrupt processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the main processing executed by main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. , After that, interrupt prohibition processing S1020 for prohibiting interrupts, winning random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) and jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM) related to special symbols and normal symbols Random number initial value update processing S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM), and the first variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), variation pattern, etc. ~ A variation counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the fourth variation type counter (a partial area of the RAM) and an interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting an interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a request for a timer interrupt occurs before the interrupt permission processing S1023, the timer interrupt processing is executed immediately after the interrupt permission processing S1023.

In a series of control start processing, program start processing S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (partial area of RAM) that controls program execution, interrupt mode setting processing S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and payout control board A start-up standby process S1003 is executed to wait for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub control board 940, etc. start up.

After the start-up standby process S1003, the determination process S2001 of the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power/emission control board 900 is performed. In determination processing S2001, when it is determined that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S2001: N), the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply/firing control board 900 determination processing S1004, power failure information (partial area of RAM) value determination processing S1005, and stored information storage state determination processing S1007 are performed. No is determined. Here, the stored information is information necessary to restore the game state before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. The value of the counter related to the unit game in the middle, the value of the counter stored by the start winning, etc. are exemplified.

The storage state of saved information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value is calculated for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) ), it is determined whether or not the exclusive OR of the checksum value calculated in step S1007 with the RAM determination value, which is a 2's complement, is "0" (determination processing S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

If the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), if the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the save information has been saved and terminated when transitioning to the power failure state (S1005: N), or If the information is not normally held (S1007: N), RAM clear processing S1008 is executed to erase the stored information in the RAM. After it is determined that the saved information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 Ware initialization processing S1009 is executed.

After hardware initialization processing S1009, determination processing S1010 is performed to determine whether the power failure information is a power failure value. If the power failure information is a power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including recovery of held information and a recovery command indicating completion of the setting are set (recovery command output processing S1012). By restoring the held information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not a power failure value (S1010: Y), various types of information are initialized without restoring the stored information (RAM initial setting processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (initialization command output processing S1014).

In addition, in the RAM recovery setting processing S1011 and the RAM initial setting processing S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value. occurs, all those error states are canceled. In addition, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command Predetermined initialization processing is also executed in each of

After the initial setting of the RAM (judgment processing S1004 to initialization command output processing S1014) according to the situation at the time of startup, if the condition device was operating at the time of transition to the previous power failure state, to the special game state Preparations for returning are made (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operation state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the sub control board 940 executes a process corresponding to the game situation during the power failure state. be.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether it is a time saving state or a non-time saving state by determining whether the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and it is a time saving state In the case (S1016: Y), a time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, when it is in a non-time-saving state (S1016:N), a non-time-saving command is output (non-time-saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (partial area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

On the other hand, in determination processing S2001, if it is determined that the setting signal from the back surface setting switch 905 is in the ON state indicating that the back surface setting switch 905 is being operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), the RAM 922 RAM clear processing S2002 is executed to erase information in substantially the entire area. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, the information in substantially all areas except for the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined stages (nine types in this embodiment) of the game mode, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM 922. ing. Therefore, by the RAM clear processing S2002, the information in substantially all areas except the storage area for the setting correspondence information in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920 is erased, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, a setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is output to the setting display device 906 . The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920 . That is, the setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 .

Next, setting change processing S2003 is executed to change the setting of the game mode until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting of the game mode is changed by pressing the initialization switch 907 while the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example, . . . →T1→T2→T3→M1→M2→M3→B1→B2→B3→T1→T2→ . . ) are predetermined, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed in accordance with the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, a value corresponding to the currently selected game mode is stored in the RAM 922 as setting correspondence information. Each time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device. 906.

Therefore, the person who changes the settings, such as the manager of the game parlor, operates the initialization switch 907 until the game mode to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected while the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeating the pressing, the selection of the game mode can be completed by winning the game ball in the upper medium starting prize winning device 431A or the lower medium starting prize winning device 431B. Therefore, the setting change processing S2003 ends when the game ball is won in the medium start prize winning devices 431A and 431B after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), RAM change for newly initializing various types of information in the RAM 922, excluding information related to game mode settings (that is, setting correspondence information). A setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and it is determined that the game progresses in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 .

After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 for outputting a set command indicating completion of setting of the RAM 922 to the payout control board 930 is executed. By receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to normal game processing, and recognizes which game mode to operate. can. After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing (abbreviated as “main control interrupt processing” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920 .

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, a power failure monitoring process S1202 to an external information output process S1221 relating to substantial control such as progress control of the game of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the progress of the game has been stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be individually described.

In the power failure monitoring process S<b>1202 , the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910 . Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected for all three times, it is determined that the power failure state has occurred. If it is determined that there is no power failure in this determination, the power failure information is maintained at the energization value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that there is a power failure, the following processes are executed. First, the power failure information value is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value is calculated for a predetermined range of the storage area of the RAM, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantial control such as progress of the game and monitoring of various sensors is not performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. be. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each timer interrupt process is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter associated with the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter and the winning random number counter associated with the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (eg, "576"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and the special symbol If the value of the winning random number counter is the stipulated maximum value, it is changed to the stipulated minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circulating initial value for the winning random number counter related to special symbols, the value of the winning random number counter related to special symbols will be the same as the winning random number initial value counter related to special symbols. , and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter and the normal symbol winning random number counter are updated in the same manner as the special symbol winning random number counter. However, as the update range determined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and a plurality of counters are configured to be updated asynchronously. is referenced to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to special symbols and the winning random number initial value counter related to special symbols have the same value range, and the jackpot pattern random number counter and the jackpot pattern random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter associated with normal symbols and the winning random number initial value counter associated with normal symbols have the same value range.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value that is larger by "1" than the current value, and the special When the winning random number initial value counter value associated with the design is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to special symbols and the winning random number initial value counter related to normal symbols, except that the specified maximum value and specified minimum value are unique to those counters, the winning random number initial value related to special symbols It is updated in the same way as the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first to fourth fluctuation type counters for determining the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time), fluctuation pattern, etc. are updated. Specifically, if the value of the first fluctuation type counter is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), it is changed to a value larger than the current value by "1", and the first fluctuation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second to fourth fluctuation type counters are updated in the same manner as the first fluctuation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. be done.

It should be noted that each winning random number counter related to special symbols and normal symbols, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and each variation type counter do not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the above counters may be other configurations. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using an initial value counter, or may be configured with a random number generation IC without using a program and refer to a value as necessary. .

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the progress of the game is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. Further, in the determination processing S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is a game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol and the normal symbol Signals for controlling various notification devices such as the normal symbol display device 473 are output. Also, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as the ball feed solenoid 332, the firing solenoid 334, the right entry restriction solenoid 462, the lower entry restriction solenoid 463, the upper entry restriction solenoid 464, the switching solenoid 465, etc. A control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, middle start winning switches 441A and 441B, right start winning switch 442, lower large winning switch 443, upper large winning switch 444, role-linked operation switch 445, start switch 446, non-specific path switch 447, specific Signal states from each of the path switch 448 and the general prize winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of game balls by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read processing S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a partial area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read into the input buffer twice. , the signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state") , and the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection state"), changes in the detection state of various switches are detected. For each switch, when the previous detection state is the OFF state, if the first signal state is the ON state and the second signal state is the ON state, it is determined that the transition to the ON state is made. A detection flag (a partial area of RAM) is set according to the switch type. As described in the blackout monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each timer interrupt process is executed twice. Even if it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In timer update processing S1210, various timers (predetermined area of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, etc. are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraud such as forcibly entering game balls into various prize winning devices or forcibly operating various prize winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the entry permitting posture, and the game ball is guided to the specific path of the lower big winning device 433 by vibration. , right start winning device 432, lower big winning device 433 and upper big winning device 434 are forcibly induced to malfunction by radio waves, induction of game balls to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle start winning device 431A, A situation where there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as guiding game balls to the lower middle start winning device 431B, right start winning device 432, lower big winning device 433 and upper big winning device 434 are performed at abnormal timing Detect occurrence.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of game balls by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10), when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set , the middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right starting winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. In addition, when the lower big prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower big prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper big prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10) If the upper big winning switch detection flag is set based on this, the big winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

In the shooting control process S1213, shooting-related information for controlling shooting of game balls by the shooting device 330 is updated. Specifically, the activation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the activation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, the intermediate block for the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is detected to be closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) relative to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) 3) is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands are set according to the payout control state as necessary. In addition, the sub-control board 940 having received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one win is detected, and decremented by 1 each time a prize ball command based on that win is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control to pay out the number of game balls (for example, three) corresponding to the winning (in detail, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 receives the prize. In a situation where a ball command is requested and prize balls are being paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920 . The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a win with a different number of prize balls (for example, 13) than the first payout counter. When 930 receives the command, the payout control board 930 executes control to pay out game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol related process S1217, the unit game right reservation control and the unit game control related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol. Also, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower big winning device Operation control of 433 and upper big winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game related to the first special symbol is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, various variation pattern random numbers The value is selected based on the number of reserves of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol.

In addition, in the special symbol related processing S1217, the control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol. Also, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower big winning device Operation control of 433 and upper big winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game related to the second special symbol is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, various variation pattern random numbers The value is selected based on the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the normal symbol reservation display device 478 is executed in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the normal design, the operation control of the normal design display device 473 related to the normal design is executed, and when the normal design lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. .

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol holding display device 477 related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The combined output data is output to each device in control signal output processing S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each information for displaying the variable display and fixed display of the decorative design selected in the special design related process S1217 on the decorative design display device 479 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output processing S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub control board 940 controls the decorative pattern display device 479 based on commands received from the main control board 920 .

In motor control processing S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 or a management device (not shown) is set.

<Design sheet>
Next, the structure of the pattern sheet 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13(A) is a front view showing part of the pattern sheet 601, and FIG. 13(B) is a cross-sectional view of the pattern sheet 601 taken along line AA in FIG. 13(A). In FIG. 13B, the direction of each surface of the pattern sheet 601 is indicated by arrows for reference.

As shown in FIGS. 13(A) and 13(B), the pattern sheet 601 includes a sheet-like base material 611 extending in a belt-like shape and having light transmittance (translucency) such as transparency. A decorative pattern 621 formed on (the surface facing the reel body when the pattern sheet 601 is attached to the reel body) and the surface of the base material 611 (the pattern sheet 601 is attached to the reel body). and a decorative portion 622 formed on the surface facing outward in the state).

The decorative pattern 621 includes a main pattern 621A capable of forming a big winning pattern and a sub-symbol 621B not forming a big winning pattern. The decorative patterns 621 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the pattern sheet 601 so that main patterns 621A and sub patterns 621B alternate.

The main pattern 621A is configured as a pattern including information defining individual numerical values (this information is hereinafter referred to as "numerical information") such as numbers and characters corresponding to numbers. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13A, the main pattern 621A includes numbers indicating numerical values such as "2" and "3" and characters corresponding to each number (for example, blowfish corresponding to "2" and " 3") and a turtle corresponding to "3") as numerical information.

In the main symbol 621A, the numerical information may be composed only of numbers indicating numerical values, or may be composed only of characters corresponding to respective numerical values (numbers). All of the main symbols 621A are patterns that include only numbers indicating numerical values as numerical information, patterns that include only characters corresponding to each numerical value as numerical information, or numbers indicating numerical values and characters corresponding to each number. and , as numerical information, may be unified with any one of the patterns, or these patterns may be mixed.

The main pattern 621A is configured as a pattern including number information corresponding to each numerical value from "1" to "9", for example. Note that the main symbol 621A may be a symbol including numerical information corresponding to each numerical value from "1" to "9", excluding some numerical values (for example, "4").

The jackpot symbols are composed of, for example, a predetermined combination (for example, a combination of the same main symbols 621A) of the main symbols 621A in each symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row, middle symbol row). In the unit game related to special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, the jackpot symbol stops on the preset effective line. It is confirmed and displayed as a pattern.

The "effective line" is a line where the game state transitions to a special game state when a jackpot symbol by a decorative symbol is displayed on the line as a stop symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, five activated lines are set. Specifically, three horizontal effective lines (specifically, the uppermost line, the lowermost line, and the middle line between the upper and lower lines); , two oblique valid lines (specifically, an upward valid line and a downward valid line) are set.

Note that the number of valid lines to be set does not necessarily have to be five, and an appropriate number of one or more can be set. For example, the upper line, lower line, and middle line may be set as effective lines, or one effective line such as the middle line may be set.

The main symbols 621A are arranged on the symbol sheet 601 so that the numerical values of the numerical information are arranged in ascending or descending order from top to bottom when the reels are viewed from the front. For example, in the symbol sheet 601 used for the reel corresponding to the left symbol row in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main symbol 621A corresponds to numerical information when the reel is viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom. On the other hand, in the symbol sheet 601 used for each reel corresponding to the right symbol row and the middle symbol row, the main symbols 621A are arranged such that the numerical values corresponding to the numerical information are arranged in descending order from top to bottom when the reels are viewed from the front. arrayed.

The sub-design 621B is configured as a predetermined design that is smaller than the main design 621A and does not contain numerical information. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the secondary symbol 621B is configured as a star-shaped symbol. In the pattern sheet 601, the sub pattern 621B is arranged between two main patterns 621A.

The decorative pattern 621 (main pattern 621A, sub-pattern 621B) is formed as a coating film on the back side of the base material 611 by printing using ink having optical transparency. Therefore, when the backlight (not shown) provided on the inner peripheral side of the reel body is turned on, the light from the backlight is transmitted through the decorative pattern 621 and the base material 611. The decorated pattern 621 can be displayed by light emission.

The decorative portion 622 is provided outside the forming area of the decorative pattern 621 (the main pattern 621A and the sub-pattern 621B) on the pattern sheet 601 . The decorative portion 622 is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors used to color the decorative pattern 621 . The "at least part of the color used to color the decorative pattern 621" includes, for example, the main color used to color each main pattern 621A included in the decorative pattern 621 (e.g., the color used to color the largest area of the main pattern 621A). ) that reflects light most easily (for example, the color with the highest lightness), or the color that most easily reflects light among the colors used to color all the decorative patterns 621 .

Also, the “color configured to easily reflect light” may be defined by, for example, the presence or absence of luster, or may be defined by the lightness of the color. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, the decorative pattern 621 is colored with ink that does not contain a glittering material, and the decorative portion 622 reflects light more than at least part of the color coloring the decorative pattern 621. Colors that can be easily configured include bright colors such as metallic colors (for example, gold and silver) and pearly colors (for example, pearly white).

Alternatively, the decorative part 622 is configured to have a color that reflects light more easily than at least a part of the colors used to color the decorative pattern 621. It may be colored with a color having a high brightness (for example, a high brightness color such as white or pale yellow).

As shown in FIG. 13B, the decorative portion 622 is formed on the front surface side of the base material 611 by printing with ink of a color configured to easily reflect light. As a result, the decorative portion 622 protrudes forward (front side) from the decorative pattern 621 formed on the back side of the base material 611, and the decorative portion 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative pattern 621. can. The decorative portion 622 may have a smooth surface (a surface facing outward) or may have an uneven surface. and may be mixed.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a decorative pattern 621 is formed on the back side of a sheet-like base material 611 having light transmittance (translucency), and a decorative pattern 621 is formed on the front side of the base material 611. A decorative portion 622 is formed on the peripheral side of 621 . As a result, the decorative portion 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative pattern 621, so that the decoration feeling of the decorative pattern 621 by the decorative portion 622 can be improved.

In particular, the decorative portion 622 is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the color of the decorative pattern 621. Thereby, the feeling of decoration by the decorative portion 622 can be improved more suitably.

Thus, by improving the feeling of decoration by the decorative portion 622, the degree of attention to the decorative pattern 621 in which the decorative portion 622 is provided on the peripheral side can be improved, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine. can be made

In addition, the reel of the reel device constituting the decorative pattern display device 479 includes a base material 611, a decorative pattern 621 formed with a coating film on the back side of the base material 611, and a coating film formed on the front side of the base material 611. Since the pattern sheet 601 having the decorative portion 622 is adhered to the outer peripheral surface of the reel body, the decoration feeling by the decorative portion 622 is improved. display) can be favorably improved.

<Second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is drawn with a pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as "first embodiment") are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. do. Further, the configuration described below as the second embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above, or may be part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above. You may make it prepare instead of .

FIGS. 14A to 14C are front views of the decorative design display device 479 of the second embodiment. FIG. 14D is a front view showing part of the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row. In FIGS. 14B and 14C, for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is indicated by a dashed line.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, heaters 650 functioning as heat sources are provided on the inner peripheral sides of the respective reel bodies corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2. , are provided at positions where they can overlap patterns 721A and 721B, which will be described later, when viewed from the front.

The pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is normally difficult or invisible to be visually recognized, but when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, the light is retroreflected to be visually recognized. Patterns 701, 702, and 703 that are possible are provided. The patterns 701, 702, 703 are drawn across the pattern sheets 601 corresponding to the respective pattern rows Z1, Z2, Z3. It is composed so that the pattern is completed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14(B), the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is arranged on the middle line L2, and the confirmation display is performed. (that is, when the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" is determined and displayed as the stop symbol), the symbol 701A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 and the , the pattern 701 is completed by the pattern 701B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2 and the pattern 701C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(C), in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2, a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" is arranged on the middle line L2, and in the middle symbol row Z3 When the confirmation display is made in a state where the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" is arranged on the middle line L2, the symbol 702A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. Then, the pattern 702 is completed by the pattern 702B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2 and the pattern 702C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3.

That is, in a configuration in which the decorative symbols 621 to be variably displayed are stopped in the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z2, and the middle symbol row Z3, the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 are numbers corresponding to the numerical value "5". After the ready-to-win display is generated on the middle line L2 by the main symbol 621A including information, the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the numerical value "9" stops on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z3. More specifically, the pattern 702 is completed when the winning pattern constitutes a losing reach).

Further, in the pattern sheet 601 of the example shown in FIG. 14(D), the main pattern 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the left and right pattern rows Z1 and Z2 is arranged on the middle line L2. When the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the middle symbol row Z3 is arranged on the middle line L2 and is confirmed and displayed, it is provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. A pattern 703 is completed by a pattern 703A provided, a pattern 703B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2, and a pattern 703C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13). The pattern that becomes visible by retroreflecting the light when a predetermined light such as flash light is applied has retroreflectivity on the surface side of the base material 611, and when the flash light or the like is irradiated, the pattern becomes visible. is formed with ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green).

Therefore, when the predetermined main pattern 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 in the confirmation display, thereby completing the predetermined pattern (for example, the pattern 701, the pattern 702, etc.), the flash photographing by the camera can be performed. , it is possible to obtain an image in which the predetermined pattern drawn in a predetermined color is reflected.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pattern sheets 601 corresponding to the respective pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are usually invisible or invisible, but are visible when heated or heated. Different patterns 721A and 721B are provided.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the patterns 721A and 721B are viewed from the front when the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left and right pattern rows Z1 and Z2 is positioned on the middle line L2. is provided at a position overlapping the heater 650 at . The patterns 721A and 721B are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 with ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or warmed.

The heater 650 is activated when the main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is arranged on the middle line L2 (that is, the numerical value "7 is determined and displayed as a stop symbol), the sub-control board 940 is configured to heat or heat the main symbol 621A.

Therefore, when the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" is determined and displayed as the stop symbol, the symbols 721A and 721B appear in a predetermined color so as to be visible. Note that when the main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is displayed on the middle line L2 and the confirmation display is made, the heating of the heater 650 is started, the sub control board 940 ends the heating or heating by the heater 650 when the variable display of the special symbol is started after that.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is difficult or invisible in normal times, but when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, the light is retroreflected, making the pattern sheet 601 visible. and patterns 721A and 721B that are invisible or invisible in normal times but become visible when heated or heated. can be visibly displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine by different patterns that can be visually recognized depending on the situation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol is a predetermined losing symbol (for example, the losing symbol shown in FIG. can be visibly revealed by illumination (for example, flash photography with a camera). When the decorative pattern 621 is confirmed and displayed as a lost pattern, if the number of times of holding the unit game right related to the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is zero, then special pattern (first special pattern) , second special symbol), the state of the fixed and displayed lost symbol is maintained for a period of time until the start winning occurs. In other words, a specific pattern such as the pattern 702 can be maintained in a completed state over the period.

Therefore, when the reserved number of times of the right of the unit game related to the special pattern is zero, the period during which the specific pattern completed by the fixed display of the decorative pattern 621 with the predetermined lost pattern can be visually recognized is defined as the reserved number of times. is greater than or equal to 1, the period can be longer. The longer the period during which the specific pattern is visible, the more likely it is that the player will be less likely to miss the specific pattern (for example, the player will be less likely to miss the specific pattern due to the camera being unable to prepare for flash photography in time). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of not increasing the number of times the unit game right related to special symbols is reserved.

Further, when the decorative pattern 621 is confirmed and displayed as a predetermined jackpot pattern, a special game state occurs after that, and the player causes the big winning devices 433 and 434 to win game balls in the special game state. Since there is a tendency to give priority to the operation for (operation on the firing handle 252), the operation for making a specific pattern visible (for example, the operation of the camera for flash photography) cannot be performed, and the specific pattern may be missed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the special symbol lottery is not won, the completed specific pattern (for example, the pattern 702) can be visually recognized by irradiating the flash light. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a specific pattern can be visually recognized even when the special pattern lottery is not won.

As described in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 can be visually recognized when predetermined light such as flash light is applied, for example, the stage 670 is placed in front of the decorative pattern display device 479. By providing the , it is possible to improve the playability in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 can be visually recognized under a predetermined situation.

FIG. 15 is a front view of a decorative design display device 479 in a modified example of this embodiment. 15, the stage 670 provided on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 479 is simply illustrated by the shape of its rolling surface. Also, in FIG. 15, game balls P1 and P2 are shown as examples of game balls rolling on the stage 670 for reference. Also, in FIG. 15, for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is indicated by a one-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 15, in this modified example, a stage 670 is provided on the front side of the decorative design display device 479 . The stage 670 has a rolling surface that is generally W-shaped when viewed from the front. On the left end side of the stage 670, there is provided a warp passage (not shown) capable of guiding game balls flowing down the left side of the central structure 420 to the stage 670. 670 is guided to the left end side.

The game ball that has entered the left end side of the stage 670 reciprocates on the stage 670 in the horizontal direction along the rolling surface of the stage 670 . By positioning the two concave portions of the stage 670 configured in a substantially W shape at the portions corresponding to the eyes of the pattern 702 imitating a face, a game ball (for example, game balls P1, P2 ) can be seen as eyes.

As a result, when the pattern 702 can be displayed (that is, the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the left pattern row Z1 and the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the right symbol row Z2) and the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2 to complete the symbol 702, the timing of flash photography by the camera. , it is possible to obtain an interesting image as if eyes were added to the pattern 702 .

In addition, the passage through which the game ball ejected (dropped) from the two concave portions of the stage 670 configured in a substantially W shape can pass is provided with a light transmittance (transparency) through which the game ball passing through the passage can be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to make the game ball ejected from the concave portion look like a teardrop by forming the concave portion from a resin having a light property. By making the path a zigzag path that goes downward while reciprocating from side to side, it is possible to secure a period during which the player can visually recognize the game ball.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the currently set game mode can be suggested by using the configuration in which a pattern that becomes visible in a predetermined situation is drawn on the pattern sheet 601. be done.

In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the third embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, or the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above may be added. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the form.

FIG. 16(A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and FIGS. 16(B) to 16(C) are front views of a decorative pattern display device 479 of the third embodiment. is. In FIG. 16A, the reel main body R and the pattern sheet 601 attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel main body R are shown separated from each other in order to facilitate understanding of the drawing. Also, in FIG. 16A, for reference, the direction of light irradiation by the light emitter 690 is illustrated by arrows, and the decorative patterns 621 positioned on the upper line, middle line, and lower line are displayed in the vertical direction. The range is illustrated.

16(B), 16(C), and 16(D), for reference, the positions of the upper line L3, the middle line L2, and the lower line L1 are indicated by dashed lines. ing. 16(B), 16(C), and 16(D), the density of coloring in the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C is represented by the density of hatching in order to facilitate understanding of the drawings. ing. Specifically, the darker the color, the denser the hatching.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16(A), on the inner peripheral side of each reel main body R corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3, a heat source similar to the heater 650 is provided. Functioning heaters 650A, 650B, 650C are provided. More specifically, the heater 650A is provided at a position that overlaps the main pattern 621A positioned on the upper line L3 when viewed from the front, and the heater 650B overlaps the main pattern 621A positioned on the middle line L2 when viewed from the front. The heater 650C is provided at a position overlapping the main symbol 621A positioned on the lower line L1 in a front view.

Heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C are configured as heaters having different temperatures due to heating (warming). Specifically, the heater 650A can be heated to the highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C, and the heater 650A can be heated to the second highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C. A heater 650C is a heater capable of heating to the lowest temperature among heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C. Heating (warming) by the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C is controlled by the sub-control board 940. FIG.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheets 601 corresponding to the respective pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 have patterns that are normally invisible or invisible but become visible when heated or heated. 741A, 741B, 741C are provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the design 741A is a main design including number information corresponding to the numerical value "7" among the main designs 621A provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the left design row Z1. It is an annular pattern surrounding the periphery of the pattern 621A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the design 741B is a main design 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" among the main designs 621A provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the right design row Z2. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the perimeter of the . Further, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the design 741C is a main design 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" among the main designs 621A provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the middle design row Z3. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the perimeter of the .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13). , is formed on the surface side of the substrate 611 with ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or warmed. The inks forming the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are configured to develop darker colors as the temperature of heating or heating is higher.

Therefore, a main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, a main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and a numerical value in the middle symbol column Z3 When the main symbol 621A including the numeric information corresponding to "8" is placed on the upper line L3 and the confirmation display is performed, the heater 650A heats (warms) the symbol 741A. , 741B and 741C are darker in color than when heated by the heater 650B or 650C with the main pattern 621A arranged on the middle line L2 or the lower line L1, as shown in FIG. 16B. is displayed.

In addition, when the main pattern 621A is placed on the middle line L2 and the final display is performed, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are heated (warmed) by the heater 650B. As shown in C), the main patterns 621A are thinner than when heated by the heater 650A with the main patterns 621A arranged on the upper line L3. It is displayed in a darker color than when heated at 650C.

Further, when the confirmation display is performed with these main symbols 621A arranged on the lower line L1, heating (heating) by the heater 650C causes the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C to As shown in 16(D), these main symbols 621A are displayed in a lighter color than when heated by heater 650A or heater 650B while being arranged on upper line L3 or middle line L2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to change the setting of the ball output rate (the setting of the game mode) by operating the back setting switch 905 (see FIG. 9) and the initialization switch 907 (see FIG. 9). The currently set game mode is suggested by the color intensity of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C.

Specifically, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the payout ratio that provides the highest profit rate for the player (that is, top type , middle type, and bottom type) are set, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C have the darkest color (that is, other game modes are set). darker color).

More specifically, when a game mode with a first stage probability is set for each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type, the sub control board 940 performs a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second A main symbol 621A containing number information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol row Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%) in a unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery is not won. , a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol row Z2 and a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the upper line L3. , and the heater 650A is heated or warmed. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C can appear in darker colors than when other game modes are set.

In addition, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the payout rate with the lowest profit rate for the player (that is, top type, middle type, etc.) and bottom type) are set, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are the lightest colors (i.e., when another game mode is set). lighter color).

More specifically, when a game mode with a third-stage probability is set for each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type, the sub-control board 940 executes a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second A main symbol 621A containing number information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol row Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%) in a unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery is not won. , the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "9" in the right symbol row Z2 and the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "8" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the lower line L1. is displayed, and the heater 650C is heated or warmed. Thereby, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C can be made to appear in lighter colors than when other game modes are set.

In addition, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the payout ratio that gives the second highest profit rate for the player (that is, the top type , middle type, and bottom type) are set, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are set to the first-stage probability game mode for each type. It is configured to appear in a lighter color than in the normal case and in a darker color than when the third-stage probability game mode for each type is set.

More specifically, when the game mode of the second stage probability is set for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, the sub-control board 940 performs a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second A main symbol 621A containing number information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol row Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%) in a unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery is not won. , a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol row Z2 and a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2. is displayed, and the heater 650B is heated or warmed. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are colored lighter than when the game mode with the first-stage probability is set for each type, and darker than when the game mode with the third-stage probability is set for each type. can be made to appear.

The appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) is not won is a fixed value of 1 (for example, approximately 10%). or a variable value that changes depending on the situation. For example, the appearance probabilities of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C may be changed according to the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbols is reserved. Concretely, for example, the structure may be such that the higher the number of times the unit game right is reserved for the special symbol, the higher the appearance probability of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may be changed according to the length of the game time. For example, the longer the game time, the higher the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C. The game time is, for example, a so-called "customer waiting effect" (that is, a game state such as a title display or a demo display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time). It may be the time measured from the timing when the effect display irrelevant to the display) ends, or the time during which the firing handle 252 is continuously operated.

Alternatively, the appearance probabilities of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may be changed according to the game mode. For example, in the variable probability gaming state, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may be higher than in the normal gaming state.

A main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, a main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and a numerical value in the middle symbol column Z3. Heating or heating of the heaters 650A, 650B, 650C is started when the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to "8" is arranged on the lines L1, L2, L3 of each stage and is confirmed and displayed. If so, the sub-control board 940 terminates the heating or heating by the heaters 650A, 650B, 650C after that when the variable display of the special symbols is started.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the patterns 701, 702, 703 (see FIG. 14) provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are usually invisible or invisible. However, it is configured as a pattern that becomes visible when irradiated with a black light. That is, the patterns 701, 702, and 703 in this embodiment are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 with ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green) when black light is irradiated.

On the front side of each reel (reel body R and pattern sheet 601) corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, there is provided a luminous body as a light emitting means capable of irradiating black light to the range to be the display area of the decorative pattern. 690 (eg black light LED) is provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), black light LEDs as light emitters 690 directed to the display area of the decorative pattern on each reel are mounted on the front upper side and the front lower side of each reel in the width direction of each reel. They are arranged in rows in the horizontal direction.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the main symbol 621A containing the number information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left and right symbol rows Z1, Z2 is located on the middle line L2, the symbols 701, 702, 703, etc. When the pattern is completed, the sub-control board 940 is configured to cause the light emitter 690 to emit light (that is, emit black light). Thereby, when the predetermined main symbol 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 in the confirmation display, the player can visually recognize each symbol such as the symbols 701, 702, 703.

In the configuration in which the patterns 701, 702, 703 and the like are formed on the pattern sheet 601 with ink that emits light of a predetermined color when irradiated with black light, it is not always necessary to provide the light emitter 690 capable of irradiating with black light. Instead, the player may display the patterns such as the patterns 701, 702, and 703 using a light-emitting means that the player owns or lends and is capable of emitting black light.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is not won, there is a predetermined probability that the pattern becomes visible by heating or heating. 741A, 741B, and 741C are heated at a temperature corresponding to the currently set game mode. Since the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are configured to develop a darker color as the temperature of heating or heating increases, the player can see the current state of the pachinko machine 100 according to the depth of coloring of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C. The type of game mode, that is, the game ball payout rate (machine split, payout rate) can be determined.

Therefore, it is possible to add a game feature in which the player guesses the probability information about the gaming machine in play based on the difference in color intensity of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C. For example, considering whether the pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, it is one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine. Since the estimated probability information can be used, it is possible to improve the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, by providing the light-emitting decorations 780 with improved decorativeness on the peripheral side (edge side), the player's attention is improved.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fourth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to third embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment.

FIG. 17 is a front view of the game board 400 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 18(A) is a front view of the light-emitting decoration 780, and FIG. 18(B) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the light-emitting decoration 780 along line BB in FIG. 18(A).

In FIG. 18A, for reference, a schematic boundary line G between the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 in the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. there is Also, in FIG. 18B, arrows J1 and J2 indicate an example of paths along which light output from a light emitting body 782 as light emitting means travels, for reference.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a star-shaped luminous ornament 780 is provided in the approximate center of the upper portion of the central structure 420 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 18(A) and 18(B), the light-emitting decorative body 780 includes light-emitting bodies 781 and 782, a substrate 783, an inner lens 784, a reflector 785, a decorative lens portion 786, and a projecting portion. 787 , a peripheral side decorative portion 788 , a decorative sheet 789 and a reflective component 790 .

The light emitters 781 and 782 are configured including light sources capable of expressing full colors (for example, full color LEDs, etc.). The light emitters 781 and 782 emit light in predetermined colors under light emission control by the sub control board 940 . The light sources constituting the light emitters 781 and 782 do not necessarily have to be light sources capable of displaying full color, and may be light sources that emit light in a single color (for example, white LEDs, etc.).

The light emitter 781 is light emitting means arranged inside the inner lens 784 . The luminous body 782 is a light-emitting means arranged outside the inner lens 784 and on the rear side (lower side in FIG. 18B) with respect to the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 so as to overlap the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 in a front view. is. The light emitters 781 and 782 are arranged on the front side of the substrate 783 (upper side in FIG. 18(B)). The substrate 783 is a circuit board such as a printed circuit board provided with the light emitters 781 and 782 and electronic components such as resistors for operating the light emitters 781 and 782 .

The inner lens 784 is made of a resin (acrylic resin, for example) having light transmittance (translucency) such as a transparent resin, and transmits (guides) the light output (lighted) from the light emitter 781 . The inner lens 784 includes a top surface portion 784A that overlaps the front side of the light emitter 781 when viewed from the front, and a side surface portion 784B that is continuous with the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 784A. be done.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the inner lens 784 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section. More specifically, the top surface portion 784A is configured in a substantially horizontal flat plate shape, and the side surface portion 784B is configured in a substantially vertical flat plate shape.

The outer shape of the inner lens 784 on the top surface portion 784A side (the outer shape of the inner lens 784 on the front side) is the inner surface of the decorative lens portion 786 described later (more specifically, the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the inner surface of the side surface portion 786B). It is constructed in a shape that can be fitted to a surface composed of a surface and a surface).

The reflector 785 is a light-impermeable component having a color capable of reflecting light (for example, white), and is adjacent to the outer side of the inner lens 784 on the rear side (more specifically, on the rear side of the side surface portion 784B). provided. The reflector 785 reflects, toward the inner lens 784 , light emitted outward from the rear side (the side closer to the light emitter 781 ) of the side surface portion 784 B of the inner lens 784 . As a result, the light output from the light emitter 781 can be preferably guided forward (that is, toward the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784).

In addition, the reflector 785 is positioned between the light emitter 782 and the side surface portion 784B of the inner lens 784, and preferably directs the light output from the light emitter 782 to the front side (that is, the side of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788). can be induced to

Therefore, since the reflector 785 is arranged between the light emitter 781 and the light emitter 782, the light output from the light emitter 781 can be incident on the decorative lens portion 786 via the inner lens 784. Light output from the light emitter 782 can be made incident on the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 . A reflector similar to the reflector 785 may be provided on the side of the reflective component 790 with respect to the light emitter 782 (the side opposite to the reflector 785).

The reflector 785 does not necessarily have to be a light-impermeable part having a color capable of reflecting light, and each surface on the inner lens 784 side and the light emitter 782 side is mirror-finished (for example, chrome plating). It may be configured to have a light-impermeable surface.

The decorative lens portion 786 is made of a resin (for example, acrylic resin) having optical transparency (translucency) such as a transparent resin, and when the light emitter 781 is turned on (when light is output from the light emitter 781) In addition, the light transmitted through the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 is transmitted (light-guided).

The decorative lens portion 786 includes a top surface portion 786A overlapping the front side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 in a front view, and a side surface portion 786B connected to the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative lens portion 786 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section, as shown in FIG. 18(B). More specifically, the top surface portion 786A is configured in a substantially horizontal flat plate shape, and the side surface portion 786B is configured in a substantially vertical flat plate shape.

A front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A is exposed so as to be directly visible to the player in an area in which the later-described projecting portion 787 is not provided. Therefore, when the light-emitting body 781 is turned on, the player can see the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 through the top surface portion 786A.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the exposed portion of the decorative lens portion 786 on the top surface portion 786A is configured in a star shape when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 18(A). Therefore, in this configuration, when the light-emitting body 781 is turned on, the player can see the light-emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape by the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. The decorative lens portion 786 functions as a first decorative portion that constitutes the main body portion of the decoration in the light-emitting decorative body 780 .

In particular, in the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is configured in a plate shape having a substantially flat front surface 786A1. A decorative shape (in this embodiment, a star shape) can be illuminated in a plane.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is configured to have a flat plate shape extending substantially horizontally. It may be a plate-like shape that inclines backward as it increases. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 has a flat plate shape, that is, the front surface 786A1 (the front surface visible to the player) and the rear surface (facing the inner lens 784 side). However, either one of the front surface 786A1 or the rear surface, or each surface thereof, may be a curved surface, and may be a flat surface or a curved surface that includes fine unevenness. may

The protruding portion 787 is made of resin having the same optical transparency as the decorative lens portion 786, and protrudes forward from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the protruding portion 787 is integrally formed with the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788, which will be described later, so as to be continuous with the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. It should be noted that the projecting portion 787 may be configured as an independent component with respect to the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 .

The projecting portion 787 is provided at least along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is provided in a substantially straight line connecting adjacent recesses.

An end face 787A on the front side of the projecting portion 787 is subjected to light diffusion processing such as surface roughening (for example, texturing). As a result, natural light is diffused at the end surface 787A, and the end surface 787A can be made to appear whitish. Note that, instead of roughening the end face 787A, the end face 787A may be printed with a color that easily reflects light, such as white or a metallic color (for example, silver or gold).

The peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is made of a resin having the same optical transparency as that of the decorative lens portion 786 , and is provided along the entire circumference of the peripheral edge side (outer side) of the decorative lens portion 786 . More specifically, the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 protrudes outward from the side surface portion 786B over the entire circumference of the decorative lens portion 786 .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is integrally formed with the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787 so as to be continuous with the side portion 786B. Note that the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 may be configured as an independent component with respect to the decorative lens portion 786 and the projecting portion 787 .

A front surface 788A of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 (a surface on the front side visible to the player) is formed in a substantially horizontal and substantially flat plane. Note that the front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be a substantially horizontal, substantially flat plane, and may be a plane that inclines in a predetermined direction (for example, a plane that inclines rearward as it goes outward in a front view) or a substantially flat plane. good too. Also, the front surface 788A of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 may be a curved surface, or may be a plane or curved surface including fine irregularities.

In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the front surface 788A of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is configured to be positioned rearward from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. In the example shown in FIG. Note that the front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be located on the rear side of the front surface 786A1. The front surface 788A may be located on the front side of the front surface 786A1, or may be substantially aligned with the front surface 786A1 in the front-rear direction. .

On the other hand, the rear surface 788B (surface facing the light emitter 782 side) of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined away from the substrate 783 toward the outside. As a result, part of the light output (emitted) forward from the light emitting body 782 enters from the rear surface 788B and is transmitted forward (toward the front surface 788A), and part of the light is reflected at the rear surface 788B. Then, as shown in FIG. 18(B), it advances backward and outward.

Although the details will be described later, the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 includes light corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782 (directly incident light, or light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 after being reflected by the rear surface 788B). light). Therefore, in the luminous decoration 780, the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is the edge portion as the second decorative portion with respect to the front view shape (star shape in this embodiment) of the decorative lens portion 786 as the first decorative portion. function as

The decorative sheet 789 is made of a resin sheet having a light transmittance (translucency) of 1 and configured in the outer shape (in this embodiment, a star shape) of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. It is arranged between the top surface portion 786A of the lens portion 786 and the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 . The decorative sheet 789 may be attached to the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A (the surface facing the inner lens 784 side) or the front surface of the top surface portion 784A (the surface facing the decorative lens portion 786 side). Alternatively, it may be sandwiched between the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the front surface of the top surface portion 784A.

Note that the decorative sheet 789 does not necessarily have to be one resin sheet formed in the outer shape of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, and a plurality of resin sheets divided into the shape of the top surface portion 786A surrounded by the projecting portion 787. may be a resin sheet. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 18(A), the decorative sheet 789 includes resin sheets corresponding to five approximate triangles formed on the convex side of the star and one approximate pentagon formed on the center side. and the resin sheet corresponding to .

The decorative sheet 789 is configured as a light-transmissive sheet entirely colored with a single color (for example, each single color such as yellow or blue) or multiple colors. Accordingly, when the light emitter 781 is turned on, the light emitted from the front surface 784A1 of the decorative lens portion 786 can be colored according to the color of the decorative sheet 789. FIG. As a result, for example, in a configuration in which both the inner lens 784 and the decorative lens portion 786 are made of transparent resin, the player can visually recognize the color of the light-emitting decorative body 780 that shines star-shaped with the color of the decorative sheet 789 .

When the decorative sheet 789 is colored with a plurality of colors, the plurality of colors may be colored as independent regions, or the plurality of colors may be colored with a gradation. Also, the decorative sheet 789 may have a structure on which a predetermined pattern (pattern, picture, character, etc.) is drawn.

The reflective component 790 is a resin component that is provided on the outer side of the light emitter 782 and has a function of reflecting the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 so that it travels forward and outward. be.

The reflective component 790 has a front surface 790A which is a slanted surface that is spaced downward from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decoration 788 and that, like the rear surface 788B, is inclined away from the substrate 783 toward the outside.

In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is configured as an inclined surface that is substantially parallel to the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788. In the example shown in FIG. Note that the front surface 790A does not necessarily have to be substantially parallel to the rear surface 788B. ).

A portion of the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 overlaps the peripheral decoration 788 when viewed from the front, and the remainder of the front surface 790A does not overlap the peripheral decoration 788 when viewed from the front (i.e., is directly visible when viewed from the front). are arranged as follows. The width of the region (non-overlapping region X3) of the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 that does not overlap the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front (non-overlapping region X3) is, for example, preferably approximately 3 mm or more, and approximately 5 mm or more. is preferred.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light emitted forward from the light emitter 782 is emitted from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 (more specifically, the reflective surface 790A described later). film portion 790B), part of the light reflected at the front surface 790A enters from the rear surface 788B (for example, arrow J1), and part of the light enters the peripheral edge side decorative portion Inclination angles of the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decoration 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 so that the outer side of the peripheral edge side decoration 788 can be advanced (eg, arrow J2) without being incident on the 788; Also, the amount of overlap (overlapping width) between the rear surface 788B and the front surface 790A in a front view is set.

A front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is formed with a reflective film portion 790B that is opaque and capable of reflecting light. The reflective film portion 790B is, for example, a coating film having a substantially uniform thickness formed by depositing, coating, or printing a bright pigment such as a metallic pigment.

The reflective film portion 790B may be composed of a single color or may be composed of multiple colors. The color of the reflective film portion 790B may be the same as or similar to the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789. Such a configuration gives a sense of unity to the color of the light-emitting decorative body 780. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the color scheme from becoming unnatural or excessively gorgeous.

As described above, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is an inclined surface that is inclined away from the substrate 783 toward the outside. The light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the decorative portion 788 can be reflected forward and outward by receiving it on the reflective film portion 790B.

In the following, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B based on the light from the light emitter 782 (that is, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788) is referred to as " It is also called "specific reflected light".

According to the light-emitting decoration body 780 configured as described above, the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the region that overlaps the rear side (the side of the substrate 783) of the peripheral edge side decoration portion 788 in a front view. is provided with the light emitter 782, the light output from the light emitter 782 is directly incident on the inner side of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 (the side close to the decorative lens portion 786).

On the other hand, the reflective film portion 790B (more specifically, the reflective film portion 790B) of the reflective component 790 is located outside the light emitter 782 in the region overlapping the rear side of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front. part of the inner side of the ) is arranged. As described above, the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 receive part of the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B (specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B) from the rear surface 788B. Therefore, part of the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B can be incident on the outer side of the area where the light output from the light emitter 782 is directly incident on the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788. can.

Therefore, of the light incident from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788, the direct light from the light emitter 782 is transmitted through the direct light transmission region X1 on the inner side, and the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B is The reflected light transmission region X2 on the outer side of the direct light transmission region X1 is transmitted.

In FIG. 18A, a straight boundary line G is shown as a boundary between the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2, but the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 need not be clearly separated at the boundary line G, and a configuration exists in the vicinity of the boundary line G where both the direct light from the light emitter 782 and the specific reflected light from the reflecting film portion 790B are transmitted. There may be.

In addition, the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 are positioned outside the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 without part of the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B entering the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788. side (that is, the outer side of the reflected light transmission region X2), part of the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B is transmitted to the outer side of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788. It can travel through the air as a light that is directly visible to humans.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the reflector 785 is provided between the light emitters 781 and 782, the light emitted from the light emitters 781 and 782 causes the decorative lens portion 786 and the Each of the peripheral edge side decorative portions 788 can be illuminated independently. Therefore, the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 can be illuminated independently as an edge portion with respect to the shape of the decorative lens portion 786 when viewed from the front (star shape in this embodiment).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a peripheral side decorative portion 788 through which the light output from the light emitter 782 can pass is provided on the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786 . Direct light from the light emitter 782 is transmitted through the direct light transmission region X1 on the inner side (closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788, and on the outer side, the reflective film portion of the reflective component 790 is transmitted. The light reflected at 790B (specific reflected light) is configured to pass through the reflected light transmission region X2.

As a result, in the direct light transmission region X1 where the light based on the direct light from the luminous body 782 is emitted and the reflected light transmission region X2 where the light based on the specific reflected light by the reflection film part 790B is emitted, the player can The appearance of light (for example, brightness, color, etc.) can be varied. Therefore, in the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 that appears to shine based on the light (direct light and specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B) output from the light emitter 782, the way it shines must differ between the inner side and the outer side. Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 (the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788).

In general, the intensity of reflected light is smaller than the intensity of incident light. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the specific reflected light from the reflecting film portion 790B of the reflecting component 790 is transmitted through the reflected light transmission region X2, the intensity of the light transmitted through the reflected light transmission region X2 is determined by the intensity of the light transmitted through the direct light transmission region X1. can be weaker than the strength of As a result, the outer side of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 can appear to shine weaker than the inner side. Therefore, since the brightness of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 can be varied, the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 can be improved.

Since the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral-side decorative portion 788 is improved as described above, the light from the light-emitting body 781 can be clearly separated from the decorative lens portion 786 that shines planarly. Therefore, the degree of attention to the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be improved. As a result, attention to the game machine can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 both correspond to the light output from the light emitter 782 (direct light or specific reflected light). Therefore, there is no need to separate the light source serving as the supply source of the light for passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the light source serving as the supply source of the light for passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 (i.e. , the light source can be shared), and in this respect, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the light sources can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 enters (enters) the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788, and The light travels as light that is directly visible to the player on the outer side of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 (that is, the outer side of the reflected light transmission region X2) without entering the decorative portion 788 . Depending on whether the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B is transmitted through the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 (more specifically, the reflected light transmission region X2) or travels on the outer side of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788, the game Since the appearance of light (for example, brightness and brilliance) can be changed by a person, it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the light-emitting decorative body 780 formed by the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a portion of the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not overlap the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 on the outer side of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front (that is, the front ), the player can see the reflected light of natural light (hereinafter referred to as " (also referred to as "naturally reflected light") and the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to give an impression different from the case where the light that the player can visually recognize on the outer side of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is only the naturally reflected light, for example, an impressive feeling of brilliance (metallic feeling). Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the decorative sheet 789 is disposed on the rear surface side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788, and the projecting portion Even if 787 is integrally molded using a transparent resin, only decorative lens portion 786 (top surface portion 786A) can be illuminated with the color of decorative sheet 789 . Therefore, it is not necessary to separately manufacture the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and in this respect the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to directly print a predetermined color, predetermined pattern, or the like on the rear surface side of the top surface portion 786A.

When the color of the decorative sheet 789 (to be described later) having light transmittance or the main color in the decorative sheet 789 is a relatively dark color such as blue, the light emitter 781 is the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color in the decorative sheet 789. It is preferable to emit light in the same color as the color or in a similar color (for example, when the decorative sheet 789 is blue, a blue-based color such as light blue). As a result, it is possible to prevent the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789 from appearing lighter than the original color compared to the case where the light emitter 781 emits light in a single white color.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the protruding portion 787 extends along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. is provided. Since the decorative sheet 789 is provided on the back side of the decorative lens portion 786 , the projecting portion 787 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative sheet 789 . Thereby, the decorative feeling of the projecting portion 787 can be improved.

In particular, since the front end face 787A is subjected to the light diffusion treatment, it looks whitish due to the diffusion of natural light. As a result, the main color of the decorative sheet 789 (for example, the color that colors the largest area of the decorative sheet 789) is set to a color that reflects less light than white. The feeling can be suitably improved.

In addition, since the projecting portion 787 projecting forward with respect to the decorative lens portion 786 is provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, the decorative lens portion 786 can be seen from the front. The shape (in this embodiment, a star shape) can be three-dimensionally decorated with the protrusions 787 . Thereby, the decorativeness of the decoration of the light-emitting decorative body 780 can be improved.

A protruding portion 787 provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is positioned between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788. Therefore, the projecting portion 787 is the shape of the decorative lens portion 786, which is the first decorative portion in the decoration of the light-emitting decorative body 780, in the front view, and the peripheral edge portion, which is the edge portion as the second decorative portion, with respect to the first decorative portion. There is a clear boundary with the decorative portion 788 . Thereby, when the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion (edge portion) in the decoration of the light-emitting decorative body 780 are illuminated independently, each portion can be illuminated clearly.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 19, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, an image corresponding to (corresponding to) an image including a part of the character appearing in the suggestive effect displayed after the predetermined ready-to-win display is displayed is displayed as the ready-to-win display. By displaying in a suggestive effect that is displayed after a different reach display is displayed, the attention of the player is improved.

It should be noted that the "suggestive effect" means the degree of possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (hereinafter referred to as "expectation for transition to special game state ), that is, an effect suggesting the degree of possibility that the decorative symbols 1621 variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 will stop at a stop symbol that is a jackpot symbol.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fifth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to fourth embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment.

FIGS. 19(A) to 19(D) are screen diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed by the decorative design display device 479 of the fifth embodiment. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is configured as an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying an image. Note that in FIG. 19B, the moving direction of the image 822 is indicated by an arrow for reference.

In the decorative design display device 479 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19 (FIGS. 19A to 19D), a decorative design 1621 is displayed as an image. The decorative pattern 1621, like the decorative pattern 621 (see FIG. 13), is a decorative pattern that corresponds to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery). It is a decorative pattern to be displayed on the display device 479 .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbols 1621 are composed of main symbols capable of constructing jackpot symbols, similar to the main symbols 621A (see FIG. 13). In addition, the decorative pattern 1621 may include a main pattern and a sub-symbol similar to the sub-symbol 621B that cannot constitute a big hit pattern.

The main pattern forming the decorative pattern 1621 is, for example, a pattern including number information indicating a plurality of types of numerical values (for example, each numerical value from "1" to "9"). It should be noted that the main pattern that constitutes the decorative pattern 1621 may be configured as a pattern that includes not only numbers indicating numerical values, but also both numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers as numerical information.

After the decorative design 1621 is variably displayed by the decorative design display device 479 in the unit game relating to the special design (first special design, second special design), it is determined and displayed as a stop design corresponding to the lottery result of the special design lottery. (stop display). The display position of the decorative design 1621 does not necessarily have to be substantially in the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 479, and the decorative design 1621 may be displayed at various positions within the display area. For example, the decorative design 1621 may be displayed on the corner side (for example, the upper right corner side) in the display area of the decorative design display device 479, as shown in FIG.

In the decorative design display device 479 of the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win display occurs in the variable display of the decorative design 1621, a predetermined suggestive effect by a moving image or an image can appear after the end of the variable display.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a ready-to-win display consisting of an odd numerical value (for example, a ready-to-win display consisting of "7") is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, after displaying the ready-to-win display, a predetermined probability , a suggestive effect in which a predetermined character appears (hereinafter, the suggestive effect is also referred to as a "first suggestive effect") is executed. Note that the first suggestive effect in which a predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only for a specific ready-to-win display such as so-called super ready-to-win.

An appropriate value greater than 0% may be adopted as the probability of executing the first suggestive effect (that is, the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") when the ready-to-win display consisting of odd numbers is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621. For example, the probability may be smaller than 100% (eg, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the first suggestive effect is always displayed (ie, 100%). It should be noted that the selection of whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect is executed under the control of the sub control board 940 .

Whether the reach display by the decorative pattern 1621 is composed of odd numbers or even numbers is determined, for example, by the main control board 920 at the start winning of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It depends on the jackpot pattern random number acquired by. More specifically, when the stop pattern determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot pattern random number is a jackpot pattern, the sub-control board 940 selects odd or even numbers according to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot pattern. Determines the configured reach display. On the other hand, when the stop symbol determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot symbol random number is a losing symbol that constitutes a losing reach, the sub-control board 940 determines whether the number is odd or even, from a predetermined number. Determines the configured reach display.

For the first suggestive effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared according to the degree of expectation (or degree of reliability) for the transition to the special game state. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state set for each production pattern is the probability of winning in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery), and if you win in the special symbol lottery. The selection probability in the selection table (hereinafter also referred to as "selection table at the time of winning") and the selection table referred to when not winning in the special symbol lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "selection table at the time of loss") Selection in Determined by probability.

Each moving image data (image data) corresponding to each effect pattern of the first suggested effect is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub control board 940 in association with each effect pattern. The sub-control board 940 selects the effect pattern of the first suggested effect, and causes the decorative pattern display device 479 to display (execute) the first suggested effect of the selected effect pattern.

In addition, the timing when the sub-control board 940 selects the effect pattern of the first suggested effect corresponds to the unit game related to the special symbol to be targeted by the sub-control board 940 from the main control board 920 (that is, the variable display of the special symbol). It may be the timing of receiving the variation pattern command from the main control board 920, or a predetermined timing between the reception of the variation pattern command and the display of the reach display by the decorative pattern 1621. . Further, in a configuration in which a period in which an operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 can be operated is provided with respect to the display of the first suggestion effect, the sub control board 940 switches to the first suggestion effect at the timing when the period ends. A configuration for selecting an effect pattern may be employed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each effect pattern in the first suggestive effect is a character that appears according to the degree of expectation (or reliability) for the transition to the special game state set for that effect pattern. are configured to differ in type. The player can relatively recognize the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state based on the type of character that appears in the first suggestive effect.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the character that can appear in the first suggestive effect is, for example, a short-haired character holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands, as shown in FIGS. 19(A) and 19(C). characters CA1 and CA2, and a ponytailed character CA3 holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands, as shown in FIG. 19(D). The difference between the characters CA1 and CA2 is the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B. That is, the characters CA1 and CA2 differ in whether the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B is a cat or a star.

For the first suggestive effect in which the character CA1 appears, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state is set to, for example, 50%, and in the first suggestive effect in which the character CA2 appears, the special game is set. The degree of expectation for state transition is set to 10%, for example. Further, for the first suggestive effect in which the character CA3 appears, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state is set at 30%, for example.

The player recognizes the degree of expectation set for each character from the instruction manual distributed for the pachinko machine 100, or determines the relative magnitude of the degree of expectation set for each character. empirically recognizable. As a result, the player can expect the transition to the special game state the most when, for example, among the characters CA1, CA2, and CA3, the character CA1 appears in the first suggestion effect, and the character CA3 When it appears, it is not as promising as the character CA1, but is more promising than the character CA2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a ready-to-win display consisting of an even number (for example, a ready-to-win display consisting of "6") is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, after displaying the ready-to-win display, a predetermined probability In the first suggestive effect, a suggestive effect in which an image appears that includes a part of the character that suggests the degree of expectation (reliability) for the transition to the special game state (hereinafter, the suggestive effect is also referred to as the “second suggestive effect”. ) is executed.

An appropriate value greater than 0% may be adopted as the probability of executing the second suggestion effect (that is, the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") when the ready-to-win display consisting of an even number is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621. For example, the probability may be smaller than 100% (eg, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the second suggestive effect will always be displayed (ie, 100%). The selection as to whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect is executed under the control of the sub control board 940 .

In the example shown in FIG. 19B, after the ready-to-win display consisting of "6" is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, images 821, 822, and 823 including part of the character CA1 appear (displayed) at the same time. ) The second suggestion effect is executed. More specifically, image 821 is an image including the left eye portion of character CA1 in FIG. 19A, and image 822 is an image including the left hand of character CA1 and part of flag 801A held in the left hand. The image 523 is an image including the button portion of the jacket of the character CA1.

In the second suggestion effect in which an image including a part of the character (for example, the image 821) appears, the degree of expectation (high degree of expectation) for the transition to the special game state is indicated by the image that appears. The player can be made to relatively recognize according to the type of character corresponding to .

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state for the character corresponding to the image appearing in the second suggestive effect is the degree of expectation when the character appears in the first suggestive effect. have been made the same. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), a player who visually recognizes images 821, 822, 823 appearing in the second suggestive effect corresponds to these images 821, 822, 823 in the first suggestive effect. The degree of expectation similar to that when the character CA1 appears can be recognized.

The images such as the images 821, 822, 823 that appear in the second suggestive effect, that is, the images including part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state in the first suggestive effect, are displayed on the sub control board 940. is generated based on an image cut out from moving image data (image data) corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestive effect stored in the ROM. Here, an image clipped from moving image data (image data) is a part of moving images or images preselected from moving images or images configured by moving image data or image data. , or may be expressed in other ways such as extracting, and the same shall apply hereinafter.

More specifically, the image to appear in the second suggestive effect is a frame of the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the characters suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state appear in the first suggestive effect. Among them, a corresponding area is cut out from a predetermined frame image including the character, and generated based on the cut out image (for example, by processing the cut out image such as deformation or scaling).

For example, the image 821 is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out the area AR1 portion from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. be. Similarly, images 822 and 823 are generated based on images obtained by cutting out the areas AR2 and AR3 from the image of the frame. Although the details will be described later, the images 821, 822, and 823 are generated by processing the images obtained by cutting out the areas AR1, AR2, and AR3, such as deformation and scaling.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the image of the frame corresponding to the display contents shown in FIG. , an image to appear in the second suggestive effect is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out each portion of the areas AR1, AR2, and AR3. Similarly, for the effect pattern in which the character CA3 appears, areas AR1, AR2, An image to appear in the second suggestion effect is generated based on the image obtained by cutting out each part of AR3.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the area to be cut out of the image in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect be an area in which the cutout image of the area can suggest the type of the character. For example, areas such as AR1, AR2, and AR3 preferably include the eyes of the character, the handle of the flag 801A held by the character in the left hand, the jacket worn by the character, the buttons of the jacket, and the like.

In the following, an image including a part of the character that suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestive effect (for example, an image that cuts out the area AR1 portion ) is also referred to as a “cutout image”.

A clipped image is generated under the control of the sub-control board 940 . Specifically, the sub control board 940 selects one effect pattern from the effect patterns prepared for the first suggestive effect, and associates the selected effect pattern with the moving image data stored in the ROM. A clipped image is generated from an image of a predetermined frame.

In addition, the selection of the effect pattern used for generating the clipped image is performed by selecting the effect pattern in the first suggestive effect from the hit time selection table or the lost time selection table prepared for selecting the effect pattern of the first suggestive effect. It is done with reference to the same case. The control is executed by the sub control board 940 .

A frame used for generating a clipped image (that is, a predetermined frame including a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state) is specified in advance by a frame number, time, or the like in the moving image data. In addition, the clipping area such as the area AR1 in the image of the frame to be clipped is specified in advance by coordinates on the image.

Note that the cutout area does not necessarily have to be a rectangular area such as the area AR1, and may be a non-rectangular area such as a circle. Also, the number of clipping regions may be one or plural. When a plurality of cutout areas are provided, the shape of each cutout area does not necessarily have to be the same shape (for example, all rectangular) like the areas AR1 to AR3. , may be mixed.

The sub control board 940 generates a clipped image by clipping a pre-specified region from a pre-specified frame image. The timing at which the sub-control board 940 generates the clipped image is when the sub-control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 the variation pattern command corresponding to the unit game related to the target special symbol (that is, the variation display of the special symbol). It may be the timing received from the substrate 920, or may be a predetermined timing between when the variation pattern command is received and when the ready-to-win display by the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed. In addition, in a configuration in which a period is provided in which an operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 can be operated with respect to the display of the second suggestion effect, the sub control board 940 generates a clipped image at the timing when the period ends. It may be a configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, an image cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestive effect (that is, the cut-out image) is processed such as deformation and scaling, and the processed cut-out image is processed. (eg, image 821, etc.) is displayed in the second suggestive effect. Processing of the clipped image (for example, deformation, scaling, etc.) and display of the processed clipped image are controlled by the sub control board 940 .

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, images 821, 822, and 823 appearing (displayed) in the second suggestive effect are rectangular shapes corresponding to the shapes of the cut-out areas AR1, AR2, and AR3. Instead, it is displayed as an image deformed into a rhombic shape when viewed from the front so that the front appears to face the lower right direction. In this way, by displaying the images 821, 822, and 823 so that they all appear to face substantially the same direction that is different from the front direction, at least one of these images 821, 822, and 823 can be displayed in the same direction. Compared to the case where the image is displayed in a direction different from that of the other images, an orderly impression can be given.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the images 821, 822, and 823 appearing in the second suggestive effect are enlarged or reduced with different enlargement/reduction ratios (enlargement or reduction ratios) with respect to the corresponding clipped images. It is a reduced image. Specifically, the size (size) of the clipped image increases in the order of the clipped image of the area AR1, the clipped image of the area AR3, and the clipped image of the area AR2. , are scaled up or down so that image 822, image 822, and image 823 become larger in that order.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to enlarge or reduce all of the cut-out images. good too. Also, some or all of the plurality of clipped images may be enlarged or reduced in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction at different scaling ratios.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of processed clipped images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) appear (displayed) simultaneously in the second suggestive effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, images 821, 822, and 823 based on images (cutout images) cut out from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. The images 823, 821, and 822 are displayed so that they can be viewed side by side in order from front to back.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of processed cut-out images appear simultaneously in the second suggestive effect, one processed cut-out image and the other processed cut-out image are at least They are displayed so that they partially overlap (that is, they appear to overlap). Control of the display is also performed by the sub-control board 940 .

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the image 822 and the image 821 are partially overlapped, and the image 821 and the image 823 are displayed so as to overlap. As a result, the content (drawing content) drawn in the area of the image 822 where the image 821 overlaps and the area of the image 821 where the image 823 overlaps become difficult to see (unvisible).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when one processed clipped image and another processed clipped image are displayed so as to overlap at least partially, the overlap makes the drawn content difficult to see. The display position of the image on the other side is moved so that the rendered content, which has been difficult to see, can be seen. Control of the display is also performed by the sub-control board 940 .

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, after the image 822 and the image 821 are displayed so as to partially overlap each other, the overlapping of the image 821 makes part of the drawn content difficult to see. The display position of the image 822 is moved leftward (arrow M direction). As the overlap between the image 822 and the image 821 becomes smaller, the area in which the drawn content becomes visible increases in the image 822 . As a result, the player can recognize that the image 822 is, for example, an image including the left hand and part of the flag 801A held by the left hand, or that the flag 801A has a pattern of a cat drawn on it. become.

Here, since the character CA1 is configured in the same manner as the character CA2 except for the pattern drawn on the flag 801A, the player recognizes that the pattern drawn on the flag 801A is a cat by moving the image 822. If so, it can be inferred that the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is the character CA1. Therefore, according to the lapse of time after the clipped image processed in the second suggestion effect appears, it is configured to facilitate the estimation of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, so that the second suggestion The playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state in the performance is improved.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, an image that appears in the second suggestive effect and includes a part of the character that suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state in the first suggestive effect is the image that appears in the first suggestive effect. A configuration generated based on an image extracted from moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern, that is, the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestive effect is diverted to generate the image appearing in the second suggestive effect. Since it is structured, it is possible to suppress the storage amount of moving image data (image data), and it is easy to reduce the need to develop effect images for the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, and the development cost can be reduced accordingly. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it corresponds to an image including a part of a character that suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, extracted from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestive effect. Since the image (specifically, an image obtained by processing the clipped image by deformation, scaling, or the like) is displayed in the second suggestive effect, the character that appears in the first suggestive effect is displayed. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state suggested by can be similarly suggested in the second suggestion effect. In addition, since the suggestion of the degree of expectation by the first suggestion effect and the suggestion of the degree of expectation by the second suggestion effect are realized with different appearances, each effect image for the second suggestion effect is developed. It is possible to increase variations of suggestive effects while suppressing costs.

Here, the image displayed in the second suggestive effect is an image corresponding to an image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state appearing in the first suggestive effect. The amount of information contained in the image is smaller than when the entire character is displayed, and it is difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

As a result, the degree of difficulty in estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state from the content of each suggestive effect differs between when the first suggestive effect is displayed and when the second suggestive effect is displayed. When the first suggesting performance or the second suggesting performance is displayed, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state is estimated from the content of each suggesting performance, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine. can be improved.

In particular, since an image cut out from moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestive effect is processed such as deformation or scaling, the second suggestive effect is displayed in the second suggestive effect. It is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in . In this respect as well, it is possible to favorably improve the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state from the content of each suggestive effect when the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is displayed.

In addition, since each image corresponding to a plurality of clipped images clipped from a plurality of regions is displayed simultaneously in the second suggestion effect, compared to the case where one clipped image is displayed, the second suggestion effect From the image displayed in , it is easy to guess the character corresponding to the image. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestive effect from becoming too difficult to guess.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of processed clipped images appear simultaneously in the second suggestive effect, one processed clipped image and the other processed clipped image are at least Since the images are displayed so as to partially overlap (that is, appear to overlap), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the overlapped image. In this respect as well, it is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestive effect. It is possible to favorably improve the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state from the content of each suggestive effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when one processed clipped image and another processed clipped image are displayed so as to overlap at least partially, the overlap makes it difficult to see the drawn content. By moving the display position of the image of the opposite side, it is possible to visually recognize the drawing content that was difficult to see. The degree of difficulty of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state from the content of the second suggestive effect can be made different according to the lapse of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the playability of guessing the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state from the content of each suggestive effect when the second suggestive effect is displayed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, instead of the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, an operating mechanism 860 is used to variably change the stroke amount of the pressing operation. An operating device 1261 is provided.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the sixth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the operation position. In FIG. 20, for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the internal configuration of the pressing operation device 1261, the base 851 and operated portion 852 of the button operation portion 850, the operation cover member 870, and the bottom member 880 are shown in cross section. Illustrated in shape. Hatching of these cross sections is omitted.

20 and 21, for reference, the position of the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the surface of the front block 102 around the operation cover member 870 that can be touched by the player) is indicated by an alternate long and short dash line. Indicated by Q. In other words, the upper side of the dashed line Q indicates that part of the operation device 1261 (the operation cover member 870) is exposed (protrudes) upward from the surface of the front block 102, and the side below the dashed line Q is It shows that the operation device 1261 is buried below the surface of the front block 102 .
21, the illustration of the bottom member 880 is omitted for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the drawing, and the area below the chain line Q in the operating device 1261 (that is, the area below the surface of the front block 102) ) are shown by dotted lines.

Like the pressing operation device 261, the pressing operation device 1261 is a device that can be pressed by the player. As shown in FIG. 20 , the pressing operation device 1261 includes a button operation portion 850 , an operating mechanism 860 , an operation cover member 870 and a bottom member 880 .
The button operating portion 850 includes a base 851 , an operated portion 852 and a spring member 853 . The base 851 is configured in a cylindrical shape having a bottom surface on the lower end side. The operated portion 852 is configured in a cylindrical shape that can be accommodated on the inner peripheral side of the base 851 . The spring member 853 is, for example, a coil spring, and is interposed between the base 851 and the operated portion 852 to support the operated portion 852 with respect to the base 851 . The spring member 853 functions as a biasing means that biases the operated portion 852 upward.

A protruding portion 851A that protrudes inward is provided on the upper end side of the base 851, and a protruding portion 852A that protrudes outward overlaps the protruding portion 851A in a top view on the lower end side of the operated portion. placed in position.

As a result, the operated portion 852 urged upward by the spring member 853 is maintained in a state in which the projecting portion 852A contacts the projecting portion 851A from below as the projecting portion 851A of the base 851 acts as a stopper. be. In the button operating portion 850, the initial position of the operated portion 852 is the position where the projecting portion 852A contacts the projecting portion 851A of the base 851 from below.

When the operated portion 852 is pushed (that is, the operated portion 852 is pushed downward), the operated portion 852 resists the biasing force of the spring member 853 (that is, the spring member 853 (While deforming) move downwards. After that, when the pushing operation on the operated portion 852 ends (that is, when the operated portion 852 becomes unloaded), the operated portion 852 returns to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring member 853 .

The button operation unit 850 includes a detection sensor 854 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub control board 940 when the operated portion 852 moved downward by the push operation is positioned at a predetermined position. . Detection sensor 854 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. Hereinafter, the position of the operated portion 852 detected by the detection sensor 854 is also referred to as "the maximum pressing position of the operated portion 852 by the spring member 853". The detection sensor 854 outputs a high level signal when the operated portion 852 reaches the maximum pressed position by the spring member 853, and outputs a low level signal when the operated portion 852 moves from the maximum pressed position by the spring member 853. Output.

The sub control board 940 determines that the operated portion 852 has reached the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal, and the signal falls to a low level signal. , it is determined that the operated portion 852 has moved from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 .

When the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level, the sub control board 940 sets the maximum pressed position flag (part of the RAM) to ON. The sub control board 940 sets the maximum pressed position flag to off when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 falls to a low level signal. Thereby, the sub-control board 940 determines that the operated portion 852 is positioned at the maximum pressure position by the spring member 853 when the maximum pressure position flag is set to ON.

The operating mechanism 860 is provided below the button operating portion 850 . As shown in FIG. 20, the operating mechanism 860 includes a rack 861 which is a rod-shaped body on a toothed flat plate, a pinion (gear) 862 which meshes with the teeth of the rack 861, and a motor for rotating the pinion 862. 863. Motor 863 is, for example, a DC motor.

The operating mechanism 860 rotates (drives) the motor 863 to rotate the pinion 862 , thereby changing the position of the button operating portion 850 to the position of the rack 861 without the player's operation of the operated portion 852 . It can be moved in a direction along the tooth trace direction and in a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the motor 863 .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the operating mechanism 860 moves the button in substantially the same direction as the direction in which the operated portion 852 moves due to the deformation of the spring member 853 (restoration due to compression or urging) (that is, the vertical direction). The operation part 850 can be moved. The button operation portion 850 can be moved vertically within the movement range of the rack 861 relative to the pinion 862 in the actuation mechanism 860 .

Actuating mechanism 860 includes an encoder (not shown) capable of detecting the rotational direction, rotational position, and rotational speed of motor 863 . When controlling the movement (position change) of the button operation unit 850 by the actuation mechanism 860, the sub control board 940 detects the detection result by the encoder and controls the operation of the motor 863 corresponding to the current arrangement position.

The operating mechanism 860 is configured to be able to hold (maintain) the button operation unit 850 at a predetermined position by controlling the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 so that the detection result by the encoder is constant. As a result, the unloaded button operating portion 850 where the player does not touch the operation cover member 870 (the button operating portion 850 in which the operated portion 852 is not operated) is moved within the movement range of the button operating portion 850 by the operating mechanism 860. can be held (maintained) in place in Note that the position at which the unloaded button operating portion 850 is held by the operating mechanism 860 is also referred to as the "neutral position."

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established, the operating mechanism 860 moves to a position corresponding to the established condition among a plurality of positions predetermined as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850. is configured to hold the unloaded button operation unit 850. That is, it is configured to change according to the conditions under which the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 is established.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the button operation unit 850 in the neutral position (more specifically, the height from the surface of the pachinko machine 100) is the special symbol (first special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is configured to be higher as the number of holdings of the unit game increases.

It should be noted that when the button operation unit 850 is positioned at the neutral position, the pressing operation device 1261 is also positioned at the neutral position. It becomes higher as the number of holdings of the unit game related to the design increases.

In addition, as described above, the operating mechanism 860 is configured to hold the button operating portion 850 at a predetermined position by the torque (holding force) of the motor 863. When applied, the force can operate the operating mechanism 860 without electrically driving the motor 863, thereby moving the button operating portion 850 in the direction of the force.

For example, when a downward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operation portion 850 (that is, when the button operation portion 850 is pushed down with a force exceeding the torque), the button operation portion 850 is pushed downward by the force. can be moved to the side. Further, when an upward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operation portion 850 (that is, when the button operation portion 850 is pulled up with a force exceeding the torque), the button operation portion 850 is moved upward by the force. can be moved to the side.

As a result, in the pressing operation device 1261 of the present embodiment, the stroke amount of the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is adjusted to the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 (that is, the amount of stroke in the button operation portion 850). The stroke amount S2 of the button operation portion 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 (the movement range of the button operation portion 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 from the neutral position of the button operation portion 850). The amount of movement to the position that is the lower end of ) can be added.

The operation cover member 870 is a member that covers the button operation portion 850 from the outside, and is configured in a cylindrical shape having an operation surface on the surface on the upper end side. The operation cover member 870 has translucency, and emits light emitted by a light emitter (not shown) such as an LED disposed inside the operation cover member 870 (for example, the base 851 of the button operation unit 850). Configured to be transparent.

The back surface of the operation cover member 870 with respect to the operation surface (that is, the surface facing the button operation portion 850 side) is in contact with the operated portion 852 of the button operation portion 850, so that the player can press the operation cover member 870. When a pressing operation is performed on the operation surface, the operation cover member 870 and the operated portion 852 move downward together.

As a result, the pressing operation performed by the player on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870 becomes a pressing operation on the operated portion 852 , causing the operated portion 852 to move downward against the biasing force of the spring member 853 . , and the button operation portion 850 can be moved downward by the operation of the operating mechanism 860 .

As shown in FIG. 21, the surface of the operation cover member 870 is provided with a hold count display portion 870A. The number-of-holds display section 870A includes numbers from "0" to "8" corresponding to the number of times of holding unit games related to special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and numbers corresponding to these numbers. Line segments are drawn as scales.

In the number-of-holds display section 870A, the numbers corresponding to the number of reservations of the unit game related to the special symbols are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom, and the button operation section 850 according to the current number of reservations. At the neutral position, the number corresponding to the number of times of holding is drawn so as to be exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (one-dot chain line Q).

Thereby, for example, when the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol is zero, as shown in FIG. By being placed in the corresponding neutral position, only the number "0" corresponding to the number of times of suspension drawn on the number of times of suspension display section 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. - 特許庁

Further, for example, when the number of times of suspension of the unit game related to the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. By being placed in the neutral position, the number "3" corresponding to the number of times of suspension drawn on the number of times of suspension display section 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. - 特許庁As a result, numbers from "0" to "3" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. - 特許庁

Further, for example, when the number of times of suspension of the unit game related to the special symbol is 8, as shown in FIG. The number "8" corresponding to the number of times of suspension drawn on the number of times of suspension display section 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100 by being placed in the neutral position. As a result, numbers from "0" to "8" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. - 特許庁

Therefore, in the configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 becomes higher as the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol increases, the player can select the pachinko machine among the numbers drawn on the number of holdings display unit 870A. By visually recognizing the number displayed on the part exposed from the surface of 100, the current number of times of suspension can be grasped. That is, the pressing operation device 1261 can be made to function as a display device for displaying the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol, like the special symbol holding display devices 476 and 477 .

Returning to FIG. 20, description will be made. The bottom member 880 is a member that constitutes the bottom portion of the pressing operation device 1261 . The bottom member 880 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and a groove 880A capable of accommodating the side surface of the operation cover member 870 is provided on the peripheral edge side thereof. The groove 880A also functions as a guide for guiding the operation cover member 870 in the vertical direction. Note that the operation cover member 870 can move upward and downward only within a certain range, and has a stopper mechanism that restricts upward movement beyond a certain amount, but the illustration is omitted. ing.

The pressing operation device 1261 includes a detection sensor 890 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub control board 940 when the button operation portion 850 is positioned at the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 . . Detection sensor 890 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. The detection sensor 890 is not necessarily provided, and the position detected by the detection sensor 890 may be detected using information from a sensor (encoder) capable of detecting the vertical position of the button operation unit 850 .

The detection sensor 890 outputs a high-level signal when the button operation portion 850 reaches the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860, and the button operation portion 850 reaches the lower end of the movement range of the operation mechanism 860. Outputs a low level signal when moved.

The sub control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 has reached the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal, and the signal is low level. When the signal falls, it is determined that the button operation unit 850 has moved from the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 .

When the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal, the sub-control board 940 sets the lower edge position flag (a partial area of the RAM) to ON. When the signal received from the detection sensor 890 falls to a low level signal, the sub control board 940 sets the lower edge position flag to OFF. Thereby, the sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 is positioned at the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 when the lower end position flag is set to ON.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is in a state where the button operating portion 850 is positioned at the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 and the operated portion 852 is positioned at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853. is generated, it is determined that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated.

More specifically, when the sub control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 has risen to a high level signal, and the lower end position flag is set to ON, it is determined that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated. judge. Similarly, when the sub control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 890 has risen to a high level signal and the maximum pressed position flag is set to ON, it determines that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated. do.

When the pressing operation device 1261 (the button operation unit 850) is at the neutral position above the lower end of the movement range of the operation mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 controls the pressing operation device 1261. When it is determined that the button has been operated, the operating mechanism 860 is controlled so that the button operating section 850 returns to the neutral position. As a result, the pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position.

When the button operation portion 850 is moved by applying a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operation portion 850, the rotation of the pinion 862 causes the motor 863 to rotate. Rotational speed can be detected by an encoder (not shown) provided by actuation mechanism 860 . When the sub control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 has risen to a high level signal in a state where the lower end position flag is off, it determines that the rotation speed of the motor 863 detected by the encoder is zero. If so, the operating mechanism 860 is controlled to return the button operating portion 850 to the current neutral position.

As a result, even though the button operation portion 850 is operated (pushed in) with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 , the operation is performed before the button operation portion 850 reaches the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 . is completed, the pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position.

When pressing operation device 1261 is returned to the current neutral position, the movement speed of button operation unit 850 moving toward the neutral position within the movement range of button operation unit 850 by actuation mechanism 860 is a constant movement speed. Alternatively, the moving speed may be different depending on the state at that time.

Next, the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 configured as described above will be described. When the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is the lower end of the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20A), the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position is performed. is performed (that is, when a pressing operation is performed on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870), the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed down by the change in the position of the operated portion 852 caused by the deformation of the spring member 853. .

Therefore, the stroke amount when the pressing operation device 1261, whose neutral position is the lower end of the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860, is pushed down to the state where it is determined that the operation is performed by the sub control board 940. corresponds to the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is the position above the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20C), the neutral position When the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed, if the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is greater than the biasing force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the pressing device 1261 first moves the spring member After the operated portion 852 is pushed down to the maximum pressed position by the deformation of the 853 (see FIG. 20(D)), it is pushed down by the position change of the button operating portion 850 by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20(E)).

Therefore, when the push operation device 1261 whose neutral position is above the lower end of the range of movement of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860 is pushed down to a state where it is determined that the operation is performed by the sub control board 940. 20(D) and 20(E), the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 and the stroke amount S2 of the button operating portion 850 due to the operating mechanism 860 , that is, (stroke amount S1+stroke amount S2).

The stroke amount S2 of the button operation portion 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 is the amount of movement from the neutral position of the button operation portion 850 to the lower end of the movement range of the button operation portion 850 by the actuation mechanism 860. It is a value that fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the 850 neutral position. More specifically, stroke amount S2 is a value that increases as the neutral position of button operation unit 850 increases. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 261 of the present embodiment, the stroke amount due to the pressing operation increases as the neutral position of the button operation portion 850 becomes higher.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force to the pressing operation when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed. More specifically, FIG. 22 is a graph in which the horizontal axis represents the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis represents the reaction force to the pressing operation.

In this embodiment, the position of the operation surface of the operation cover member 870 in the pressing operation device 1261 is defined as "the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261". The position of the operated portion 852 of the button operating portion 850 may be the "operating position of the pressing operation device 1261".

When the push operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20A), which is in the neutral position at the position where the button operation unit 850 is at the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860, is pressed, the button operation unit 850 at the neutral position From the operation position A1 of the pressing operation device 1261 until it reaches the operation position Amin of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20B) in a situation where it is determined that an operation (pressing operation) has been performed by the sub-control board 940 The reaction force to the pressing operation in the section (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) increases as the spring constant of the spring member 853 approaches the operation position Amin from the operation position A1 as shown by the straight line J1 shown in FIG. It increases linearly with the slope.

Next, when the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is raised and the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position moves from the operation position A1 to the operation position A2 (see FIG. 20C), the neutral position A case where a pressing operation is performed on the position pressing operation device 1261 will be described.

In this case, when the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is greater than the biasing force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the operated portion 852 is pushed from the operating position A2 of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position to the maximum pressing position. The reaction force to the pressing operation in the section (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) up to the operation position A2x of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20(C)), which is the position, is the straight line J2 shown in FIG. , the slope of the spring constant of the spring member 853 linearly increases as it approaches the operation position Ax from the operation position A1.

A section (i.e., stroke The reaction force to the pressing operation in the interval of the amount S2 has a value corresponding to the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 in the interval.

Since the torque of the motor 863 depends on the current value applied to the motor 863, the relationship between the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force to the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is determined by the current value applied to the motor 863. Various aspects can be achieved by the control of , and a plurality of types of settings can be made so as to provide different operational feeling according to the game situation and the result of the lottery.

For example, when the torque of the motor 863 is constant regardless of the operating position of the pressing device 1261, the reaction force to the pressing operation to the pressing device 1261 is expressed by a straight line J3 shown in FIG. A certain pattern can be included in the section from the position A2x to the operation position Amin.

Alternatively, when the torque of the motor 863 is linearly increased as the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 approaches the operation position Amin, the reaction force against the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is shown in FIG. As shown by the chain double-dashed line J4, it is possible to adopt a configuration including a pattern that increases linearly from the operation position A2x as it approaches the operation position Amin.

Note that the pattern is not limited to increasing the torque of the motor 863, and a pattern of decreasing the torque of the motor 863 may be included. In such a case, the reaction force against the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 can be decreased as the operation position A2x approaches the operation position Amin. Also, patterns that combine increases and decreases in the torque of the motor 863 may be included. Also, the increase or decrease of the torque of the motor 863 does not necessarily have to be linear. A pattern including a portion where the torque decreases or a pattern including a portion where the torque increases and then becomes a minimum may be used.

Also, a pattern in which the change in the torque of the motor 863 is discontinuous in the section between the operation position A2x and the operation position Amin (more specifically, a pattern in which the torque change includes a step and is discontinuous before and after the predetermined position). may be In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 suddenly rises at the operation position X without changing the operation position, and becomes discontinuous. A change in the reaction force with respect to the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operation position X to the operation position Amin may be constant in the section as shown by a straight line J5 shown in FIG. A pattern such as the two-dot chain line J6 shown in 21(B) may be included that increases as the operation position Amin is approached.

In addition, the variation of the reaction force to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operation position A2x to the operation position X, and the reaction force to the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operation position X to the operation position Amin. Patterns with the same variation may be included, or a configuration with different variations may be used.

Further, the operation position at which the reaction force to the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is discontinuous does not necessarily have to be one as shown in FIG. A pattern in which a plurality (that is, two or more) of operation positions that make the reaction force discontinuous is provided may be included.

Further, it is not always necessary to discontinuously change the torque of the motor 863 at the operation position X (that is, to discontinuously change the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261). 3 may include a pattern in which each change mode changes continuously at the operation position X in the patterns in which the change mode of the reaction force with respect to the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is different.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the encoder (not shown) provided in the operating mechanism 860 applies a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operation unit 850 to move the button operation unit 850. The rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863 are configured to be detectable. The sub-control board 940 can detect the pressing speed (moving speed of the pressing device 1261) in the pressing operation of the pressing device 1261 and the amount of movement of the pressing device 1261 based on each value detected by the encoder.

Here, a target value is set in advance for the moving speed and the moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 that has been pressed (that is, the moving speed and the moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 that are the target values are set on the sub control board 940). ), and the moving speed or moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 detected by the sub-control board 940 based on each value detected by the encoder is stored in advance as a target value. Alternatively, when the amount of movement is exceeded, a pattern in which a predetermined effect or display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 or a predetermined accessory provided on the game board 400 operates may be included.

Specifically, when the pressing operation device 1261 (button operation unit 850) is pressed with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the sub control board 940 detects the rotation direction of the motor 863 detected by the encoder, detecting the moving speed or moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 based on the rotational position and the rotating speed, comparing the detected moving speed or moving amount with the moving speed or moving amount stored in advance as a target value, When it is determined that the detected moving speed or moving amount exceeds the moving speed or moving amount stored in advance as a target value, the decorative pattern display device 479 displays a predetermined effect or display, or the game board 400 It may also include a pattern for operating a given provided accessory.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 in accordance with a predetermined target value, thereby increasing attention to the pachinko machine 100. .

The target value may be set for either the moving speed or the moving amount, or may be a combination of both. It may be any pressing operation force. The target value may be set by a threshold value such as whether or not a predetermined target value is exceeded, or a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range may be maintained for a certain period of time or more. It may be an operation with a target for which an operation time associated with the operation is set.

In addition, it is preferable to set a plurality of types of target values, the height position of the neutral position, the magnitude of the reaction force, and the patterns of change in the pressing operation device 1261 . Then, one of a plurality of types can be selected according to the conditions based on the game situation (for example, the number of times of suspension, the time of the game, the number of times of execution of a predetermined effect (for example, display of a specific character)), or a jackpot lottery Select one of a plurality of types according to the conditions based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery such as, for example, the result of the symbol lottery, the possibility of transition to a special game state (expectation, reliability ) is preferably used as an effect suggesting to the player.

For example, the sub-control board 940 can detect the amount of movement of the pressing operation device 1261 that has been pressed, based on each value detected by the encoder. In the configuration that changes according to the number of times the unit game is held, the sub-control board 940 is when the pressing operation is performed with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 with respect to the pressing operation device 1261, and the speed below a certain level (For example, a moving speed of 0.5 seconds or less per stroke for one scale) is executed, a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery), the number of times of suspension corresponding to the unit game that has won the special symbol lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). The configuration may be such that the operating mechanism 860 is controlled to change the torque of the motor 863 discontinuously at the corresponding position.

In addition, when the unit game that has won the special symbol lottery is included in the currently held unit game, the motor 863 is placed at the position corresponding to the number of times of suspension corresponding to the unit game that has won the special symbol lottery. The probability of discontinuously changing the torque of may be greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%.

In this way, when the push operation is performed with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the push operation device 1261, the content of each unit game that is suspended (for example, whether the special symbol lottery is won or not ), the movement mode of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the change in operational feeling due to the discontinuous change in the torque of the motor 863 during the movement of the pressing operation device 1261, the pattern of the reaction force to the movement) changes. , it is possible to provide a game feature in which the content of the lottery result of each pending unit game is guessed based on the movement mode of the pressing operation device 1261 .

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a pressing operation device 1261 capable of being pressed by a player includes a button operation portion 850 in which an operated portion 852 is supported by a base 851 via a spring member 853, and a button operation portion 850. The operating mechanism 860 enables the vertical movement of the portion 850. The operating mechanism 860 can hold the button operating portion 850 at a predetermined neutral position, and the torque of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 ( By applying a downward force (pressing force) exceeding the holding force to the button operating portion 850, the button operating portion 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

As a result, the stroke amount by the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can be changed according to the change of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the neutral position of the button operation section 850). As a result, compared to the case where the amount of movement of the operated portion 852 is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the spring member 853, it is possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion 852. As a result, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be favorably improved.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 (the neutral position of the button operation unit 850) is configured to increase as the number of holdings of unit games related to special symbols increases. . Therefore, the player can visually recognize the pressing operation device 1261 to recognize the number of times of suspension, and recognize the number of times of suspension by the height of the button operation unit 850 even in a situation where the player is playing the game with his or her line of sight downward. can be made easier.

Also, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 increases as the number of times of suspension increases. As a result, the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion 852 can be made different according to the number of times of suspension, so that the player can feel the suspension by pressing the pressing operation device 1261 . The number of times can be guessed (recognized). Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game property in which the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 can estimate (recognize) the number of times of suspension of the unit game related to the special symbol without visually recognizing the information about the number of times of suspension. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by changing the value of the electric current supplied to the motor 863, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the value of the current. With 860, it is possible to variously change the operation feeling for the operated portion 852 (the operation feeling for the button operation portion 850) in the section in which the button operation portion 850 can move in the vertical direction.

For example, if the torque of the motor 863 is constant within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 without depending on the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 (operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261), the pressing operation device Since the reaction force to the pressing operation to the 1261 can be made constant within the movement range, the player can perform the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 with a constant force within the range.

Further, when the torque of the motor 863 is linearly or non-linearly increased or decreased as the operation amount (the amount of depression) of the pressing operation device 1261 increases within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the actuation mechanism 860, Since the reaction force to the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 can be linearly or non-linearly increased or decreased within the movement range, the player can press the pressing operation device 1261 within the range ( The pressing operation device 1261 can be operated while increasing or decreasing the pressure linearly or non-linearly.

As a result, the operation feeling of the pressing operation device 1261 in the section in which the button operation unit 850 can move up and down by the operating mechanism 860 can be the operation feeling of pressing with a constant force, or can be increased or increased as the amount of pressing increases. Various changes can be made, such as an operation feeling that requires the pressing operation to be performed with a decreasing force. This makes it possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion 852 . In this respect as well, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 .

In addition, by changing the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 by controlling the current value energized to the motor 863 according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, the operated portion 852 is changed. The feeling of operation when operated can be changed according to the content of the presentation.

For example, when the effect of inflating a balloon with a manual air pump is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during variable display, the torque of the motor 863 is constant in accordance with the depiction of operating the manual air pump. By controlling the current value such that , it is possible to make the operation feeling of pressing the pressing operation device 1261 constant as if operating a manual air pump. Then, when the display result of the variable display is winning or when the player is suggested that the variable display is highly anticipated, the reaction force is generated until the end of the performance, and the pushing operation maximizes the balloon. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, or in the case of suggesting to the player that it is a variable display with a low degree of expectation, the balloon is pierced and the balloon shrinks, and the shrinking display is accompanied by The torque may be reduced to minimize the reaction force, so that the balloon does not inflate.

In addition, when an effect in which a character tries to push open a tightly closed door is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, the character pushes the door to open the door. By controlling the current value so that the torque of the motor 863 is sharply reduced at the moment the door is opened, it is possible to sharply reduce the feeling of pressing the pressing device 1261 as if the door were opened. . Then, when the display result of the variable display is winning or when the variable display with high expectation is suggested to the player, the torque is reduced at the end of the effect to minimize the reaction force, and the door opens. On the other hand, in the case of a failure or in the case of suggesting to the player that it is a variable display with a low degree of expectation, the reaction force is maintained until the end of the production. It may be generated and depicted as if the door does not open.

As an effect corresponding to the display result of the variable display, not limited to the above, the state of being pushed to the bottom is continued for a certain period of time, and then the button operation unit 850 is maintained at the lower end position depending on the degree of expectation or success. The position after the operation may be changed, such as changing whether it is lifted or raised, the magnitude of the operation force (reaction force) may be changed, or a combination thereof good.

Thus, by controlling the current value energized to the motor 863 so that the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 changes in accordance with the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, the pressing The operation feeling of the pressing operation on the operating device 1261 can be made to match the performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. - 特許庁As a result, the player can feel as if he/she is participating in a predetermined performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.例文帳に追加

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value applied to the motor 863. The torque of the motor 863 can be changed discontinuously (or stepped or abruptly changed) at a predetermined position within the section in which the motor 863 can move.

As a result, when the player operates the operated portion 852 with a force exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860, the operating mechanism 860 allows the button operating portion 850 to move vertically. At a predetermined position, the operational feeling for the operated portion 852 (pressing operation device 1261) changes discontinuously. Since the operation feeling for the pressing operation device 1261 changes discontinuously at a predetermined position, the operation feeling for the pressing operation device 1261 does not easily become monotonous, thereby favorably increasing attention to the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加.

In addition, in the pressing operation device 1261 provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the position of the button operation unit 850 is configured to be variable by the operating mechanism 860, and as the control of the sub-control board 940, the elastic body is deformed to a large extent. It can be configured to include control to move the button operation unit 850 at a speed that produces an inertial force of about 100 degrees. That is, by moving the button operating portion 850 in a predetermined direction (upward or downward) by the operating mechanism 860 and then suddenly stopping the movement, the button operating portion 850 is moved to the base 851 via the spring member 853 . The supported operated portion 852 can be moved in a predetermined direction (for example, upward direction) by the inertial force received by the operated portion 852 due to the sudden stop of the button operation portion 850. , and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, downward direction).

As a result, the pressing operation device 1261 functions not only as a device for allowing the player to perform a predetermined operation (specifically, a pressing operation), but also as a device capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion 852. can be made Since the pressing operation device 1261 can constitute a part of the performance, interest in the pressing operation device 1261 can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. The pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment is devised so that the feeling of operation and the feeling of action (feeling of action) of the pressing operation device 1261 of the sixth embodiment can be suitably realized.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the seventh embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a front side perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the pressing device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 24A is a top view schematically showing the vicinity of the pressing operation device 1261, and FIG. It is a side view of the neighborhood.

24 (FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B)), for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the drawings, a pressing operation device 1261, a case 893 housing the pressing operation device 1261, and a hand table 895 are shown. Also, in each of FIGS. 24A and 24B, for reference, arrows representing the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or the up-down direction with respect to the illustrated contents are shown.

Also, in FIG. 24A, for reference, the position of the front plate 222 with respect to the pressing device 1261 and the like is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. Also, in FIG. 24B, for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the drawing, partial cross sections of the upper end sides of the case 893 and the hand rest 895 are shown, and the illustration of hatching for these cross sections is omitted. there is In addition, in FIG. 24B, for reference, a one-dot chain line QA indicating the vertical position of the opening R on the opening surface is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 24, for reference, two examples of a hand of the player operating the pressing operation device 1261 (performing a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B) and a part of the forearm connected to the hand are shown. It is illustrated by the dashed dotted line TE. In the present embodiment, the “hand” refers to a portion on the distal side of the wrist and is composed of the palm and fingers, and the “forearm” refers to a portion that is continuous with the hand and extends from the wrist to the elbow. indicates the part of

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Input operation device 260 may be configured to include rotary operation device 262 in addition to pressing operation device 1261 and selection operation device 263 .

The pressing device 1261 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper projecting portion 217, as shown in FIG. On the side closer to the player than the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, on the front side with respect to the pressing operation device 1261), there is a hand rest table 895 on which the player's hand (for example, right hand) for operating the pressing operation device 1261 can be placed. is provided. The hand rest table 895 is a table that extends forward from a case 893 that houses the pressing operation device 1261 .

The pressing operation device 1261 is accommodated in the case 893 through an opening R that faces upward. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24B, the pressing operation device 1261 is a surface on the upper end side of the operation cover member 870, and is an operation that a player touches when performing a pressing operation. The surface 870B is positioned so that the neutral position is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R (located on the dashed line QA) for housing the pressing operation device 1261 in the vertical direction, which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261. Configured.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the opening R is arranged at a position that coincides with the plane is illustrated, but the opening R may be arranged at a height position that does not coincide with the plane. For example, the operation surface 870B may be configured such that a position at which at least part of the periphery of the opening and the operation surface 870B are substantially equal in the moving direction of the operation surface 870B is the neutral position. It may be configured such that a position substantially equal to a part of the side nearer to the player is the neutral position.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. At least part of a part of the hand (more specifically, the part of the hand excluding the part of the hand that operates the operation surface 870B on the finger side) and the forearm that is continuous with the hand can be placed. be.

In other words, the hand rest table 895 serves as a support base that supports at least part of the part of the hand and the forearm connected to the hand from below so that the player can push the operation surface 870B by hand. has the function of In the example shown in FIG. 24, a wrist-side part of the player's hand and a wrist-side part of the player's forearm are supported by the hand rest 895, as indicated by the two-dot chain line TE.

Therefore, the player places and supports at least part of the part of the hand that performs the pressing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 and the forearm that is continuous with the hand on the hand rest 895. The operation surface 870B can be operated while moving. For example, as shown in FIG. 24(B), both the operation surface 870B and the upper surface of the hand rest 895 are substantially equal in the vertical direction to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 (the opening surface located on the dashed line QA). In the positional configuration, the palm is placed on the hand rest 895, and the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) is moved up and down with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum to move the hand relative to the operation surface 870B. A pushing operation can be performed. Further, by placing the hand on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum, the movement of the operation surface 870B makes it easier for the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) to move up and down. As a result, the operation surface 870B can be easily moved, and the motion of the movement can be easily felt.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is positioned substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction. It is difficult for a player who performs a pressing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B to hit the operation surface 870B, compared to the case where the operation surface 870B projects upward with respect to the opening surface of the opening R. can be done.

Therefore, as in the pressing operation device 1261 provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the operation surface 870B is positioned substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction as the neutral position, the pressing operation device 1261 A player who performs a pressing operation on the operating surface 870B is instructed not to perform a vigorous pressing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operating surface 870B, but to apply the torque (retaining force ), the operation surface 870B can be pushed slowly and carefully.

Therefore, when a downward force (pressing operation force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the pressing operation device 1261 is moved from the neutral position to the pressing operation (pressing force). ), the player can preferably experience the operation feeling of pushing (pressing), which is difficult to feel due to the forceful pushing operation. As a result, attention to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, on the side closer to the player than the pressing operation device 1261, the player who operates the pressing operation device 1261 (performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B) At least a part of the hand that performs the operation (more specifically, the part of the hand excluding the part of the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B) and the forearm that is continuous with the hand can be placed A hand rest 895 (which can be supported from below) is provided.

As a result, at least a portion of the player's hand, excluding a portion of the player's hand that operates the operation surface 870B, on the side of the finger that operates the operation surface 870B, and at least a portion of the forearm that is continuous with the hand can be supported by the hand rest 895. The hand can be stabilized, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation on an inappropriate position on the operation surface 870B.

In addition, since at least a portion of the player's hand, excluding a portion of the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B, and the forearm portion that is continuous with the hand can be supported by the hand rest 895, the hand and the Compared to the case where the forearm moves freely, the strength of the pressing operation on the operation surface 870B can be suppressed. Therefore, it is made difficult for a player who performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B (operating the pressing operation device 1261) to perform a forceful operation on the operation surface 870B (for example, by hitting the operation surface 870B). can be done.

As a result, the player who performs the push operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 is caused to carefully push the operation surface 870B against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860. be able to. In this respect as well, when a downward force (pressing operation force) exceeding the torque (retaining force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed from the neutral position. To allow a player to preferably experience the operation feeling of pushing (pressing) operation, which is difficult to feel by forceful pushing operation, in a pachinko machine 100 having a structure capable of moving in the direction of operation (pressing). , and thereby, it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The length (length WA) from the front end of the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261) to the rear end of the handrest 895 in the area including 870B and the handrest 895 is excluded (that is, The length WB) is configured to be shorter than the length (length W2) of the operation surface 870B (the pressing operation device 1261) in the front-rear direction. That is, the area including the operation surface 870B and the hand rest 895 in the pressing operation device 1261 occupies a relatively large area in the front-rear direction of the area on the front side of the front plate 222 .

In such a configuration, the size of the operation surface 870B is configured to be relatively large in the region on the front side of the front plate 222, thereby making it easier for the player to operate the operation surface 870B. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 24(A), the operation surface 870B has a size that occupies substantially half of the region on the front side of the front plate 222 in the front-rear direction, or the player uses a plurality of fingers (for example, the thumb). It is a size that can be operated with four fingers (excluding the four fingers), and is configured to be relatively large.

In this way, even when the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261) is relatively large in the region on the front side of the front plate 222, at least a part of the operation surface 870B is located on the front side of the pressing operation device 1261. , thereby enabling a suitable operation on the operation surface 870B (that is, the operation surface 870B configured relatively large), and giving the player an operational feeling of operating the pressing operation device 1261 provided with the operation surface 870B. can be suitably experienced.

In addition, as described above, the pressing operation device 1260 of the present embodiment allows a hand (more specifically, the fingertip side of the hand) to be placed on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum. By placing it, it is possible to experience the movement of the pressing operation device 1260 (the movement of the operation surface 870B) by moving the hand accompanying the movement of the operation surface 870B.

Therefore, for example, the pressing operation device 1260 of the present embodiment is similar to the pressing operation device 1260 described in the sixth embodiment, and the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is equal to the number of times of suspension of the unit game related to the special symbol. (More specifically, the number of holds increases as the number of holds increases). , the change in the number of times of suspension can be grasped intuitively.

In addition, the pressing operation device 1260 of the embodiment has a configuration in which the height of the neutral position changes according to the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol (more specifically, it becomes higher as the number of times of holding increases). , the neutral position at which the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is set to a predetermined holding number (for example, zero) that is smaller than the maximum holding number (for example, 8 times). , it is also possible to perceive whether the number of suspensions of the unit game related to the special symbols is greater or less than the predetermined number of suspensions by moving the hand placed on the operation surface 870B. It is possible.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment is devised so as to attract the player's attention even during a non-game state in which no variable display is performed.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the eighth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to seventh embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, it is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during a non-game state (waiting state) in which a variable display is not performed, which is a state of waiting for execution of a game by a player. A so-called "customer waiting effect" is composed of moving images or images obtained by diverting moving image data (image data) prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during variable display. It should be noted that animation data for effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each effect pattern.

Specifically, for example, targeting some or all of a plurality of types of effects prepared in advance, a series of partial videos ( Continuous frame images) are cut out, and the cut out video, or if there are multiple target effects, each cut out video is spliced in a predetermined order for each target effect to constitute a customer waiting effect. do.

For example, when a plurality of types of suggested effects are prepared as one of the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, some or all of the plurality of types of suggested effects (that is, at least one ), with the suggestive effect as the target, cut out a series of partial videos (continuous frame images) in the suggestive effect from each video data corresponding to each suggested effect to be targeted, and cut out the video, or When there are a plurality of such suggestive effects, a moving picture obtained by connecting each cut-out moving picture for each target suggestive effect in a predetermined order is configured as a customer waiting effect.

The "partial series of moving images" cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display may be any range of moving images in the effect. For example, a configuration may be used in which a partial moving image (successive frame images) including at least a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the target effect is cut out.

As the ``range in which a characteristic display is performed in the effect'', for example, if the target effect is a suggestive effect, a predetermined animation that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state in the suggestive effect Part (animation of a predetermined range), more specifically, for example, an animation part in which a character appears that suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, or an animation part in which the background color is a color that suggests the degree of expectation and so on. For example, in the first suggestive effect in the fifth embodiment described above, a moving image portion in which predetermined characters such as the characters CA1 to CA3 (see FIG. 19) appear is cut out as "a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the effect". It may be a configuration targeted for.

Alternatively, for example, if the target effect is a effect that prompts an operation on the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during the variable display, the effect that prompts the operation is characteristic. A moving image portion showing a specific content may be defined as "a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the production". For example, the video portion corresponding to the "effect of inflating a balloon with a manual air pump" and "effect of a character trying to push open a tightly closed door" exemplified in the sixth embodiment is changed to " It may be configured to be a target of clipping as "a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the production".

In addition, the ``range in which a characteristic effect is performed in the effect'' is a characteristic video part (for example, , animation parts in which characters that cannot be seen in other productions appear, etc.).

Note that the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be a partial moving image cut out from the target effect or a moving image obtained by connecting the cut out moving images in a predetermined order. For example, a video of the entire range in the target production, or a video in which the video of the entire range is joined in a predetermined order may be used as the customer waiting production, and a part of the target production is cut out. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a moving image in which a moving image and a moving image of the entire range of the target rendering are mixed is used as the customer waiting rendering.

The customer waiting effect does not necessarily need to be composed of a partial moving image cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display as described above, or a moving image of the entire range of the effect. For example, one or more frame images among the frame images constituting each moving image data corresponding to each of the target effects are targeted for some or all effects among a plurality of types of effects prepared in advance. Images of one or more regions may be cut out, and an image or moving image including one or more images cut out from each effect may be configured as the customer waiting effect.

Specifically, for example, as an effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display, a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state is similar to the first suggestive effect in the fifth embodiment described above. When a plurality of types of suggestive effects that appear are prepared, some or all (that is, at least one) suggestive effect among the plurality of types of suggestive effects are targeted, and correspond to each target suggestive effect. out of the frame images that make up each moving image data, one or more area images are cut out from one or more frame images, and an image or moving image containing one or more cut out images from each effect is waiting for customers It may be configured as a performance.

In this case, for example, one or more cutout images are displayed on a predetermined background image, and all images (cutout images) are displayed at once, such as an image or video, or all cutout images are displayed multiple times. Images or moving images that are divided and made to appear sequentially are configured as a customer waiting effect.

The frame image from which the image is cut out may be any one of the frame images forming the target effect. For example, if the target effect is a suggestive effect similar to the first suggestive effect of the fifth embodiment described above, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state among the frame images constituting the suggestive effect is calculated. An image of a predetermined area may be cut out from a frame image containing the suggested character.

Alternatively, if the object effect is an effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during the variable display, , a configuration for cutting out an image of a predetermined area from a frame image corresponding to an image containing characteristic content in the presentation (for example, a predetermined image including a manual air pump in a presentation to inflate a balloon with a manual air pump). may be

Alternatively, in the target production (suggestive production, etc.), regardless of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, an image containing characteristic content that cannot be seen in other productions (for example, can be seen in other productions) An image of a predetermined area may be cut out from a frame image corresponding to an image in which a character that cannot be displayed appears.

In addition, the clipping area of the image in the frame image may be any area in the target frame image. For example, when the target frame image is a frame image including a character that suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, the configuration may be such that an area including a part of the character is cut out.

In addition, the customer waiting effect includes an image or video including one or more images extracted from each effect, a video of the entire range of the target effect as described above, and a partial video extracted from the effect. may be a combination of

When the sub control board 940 determines that the pachinko machine 100 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, the sub control board 940 is in a state of waiting for the execution of the game by the player, and the non-variable display is not performed. Assuming that the game is in the game state (waiting), the display of the customer waiting effect of the present embodiment described above is started.

Specifically, the sub control board 940 determines that the firing handle 252 is not operated based on the command received from the main control board 920, and the decorative pattern display device 479 does not display the variable display of decorative patterns or the jackpot effect. The period during which the state of not being performed is continued is measured by a timer or counter provided in the sub-control board 940, and when the period exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player. It is determined that the predetermined time has passed.

In addition, the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be one type. A plurality of customer waiting effects may be prepared by changing the positions of cut-out moving images or images, or by changing the appearance order of the cut-out moving images or images.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the non-playing state (during standby), a predetermined pressing operation to the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) is performed. is performed, the mode selected under the same selection conditions as when the start winning of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs during the game (that is, during the period not in the non-playing state) A variable display (variable effect) based on (contents of variable display, variable pattern) is configured to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 . Specifically, during the non-game state, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 displays predetermined information prompting the player to start the variable display for demonstration (for example, "If you want to see a sample of the variable display, , press the button!” is displayed, and in this situation, when the pressing operation is performed, the variable display is started.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having such a configuration includes a demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, a demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, a demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demonstration pseudo variation type counter to the second 4 demonstration pseudo-variation type counters are provided on the sub-control board 940 .

These counters provided by the sub control board 940 (demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and first demonstration pseudo variation type counter to fourth demonstration pseudo Variation type counter) functions like a winning random number counter, a jackpot symbol random number counter, a stop pattern selection counter, and a first variation type counter to a fourth variation type counter, respectively, related to special symbols provided on the main control board 920. It is a counter that

The above counter provided in the sub-control board 940 will be specifically described. While the winning random number counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for performing a special symbol lottery, the pseudo-winning random number counter for demonstration (a part of the RAM in the sub control board 940) is , functions as a counter for performing a pseudo-demonstration winning/losing lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery. The demonstration pseudo winning random number counter generates a demonstration pseudo winning random number (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo winning random number") corresponding to the special symbol winning random number.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter wins a demonstration pseudo-jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "demonstration pseudo-jackpot" with the same winning probability as the jackpot winning probability of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol). ”) can be selected (lottery possible). Therefore, the demonstration pseudo winning random number counter is, for example, configured identically to the winning random number counter related to the special symbols provided in the main control board 920 .

While the jackpot pattern random number counter provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting the jackpot pattern, the demonstration pseudo-jackpot pattern random number counter (a part of the RAM in the sub-control board 940) It functions as a counter for selecting a demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot pattern (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern"). The demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number counter generates a demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number").

As for the demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbols, types corresponding to the kinds of the jackpot symbols are prepared, and the demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number counter is configured to be able to select one of the types of demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbols. .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number counter selects each type of demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol, which is a type corresponding to each type and which can be selected by the jackpot symbol random number counter. can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demonstration pseudo-big-hit symbol random number counter is, for example, configured identically to the big-hit symbol random number counter included in the main control board 920 .

While the stop pattern selection counter provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting a stop pattern, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter (a part of the RAM in the sub control board 940) It functions as a counter for selecting (selecting) a demonstration pseudo stop pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "demonstration pseudo stop pattern") corresponding to the stop pattern. The demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter generates a demonstration pseudo stop pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo stop pattern random number") corresponding to the stop pattern random number.

It should be noted that types of demonstration pseudo stop patterns are prepared corresponding to the types of stop patterns, respectively, and the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured to be able to select any type of demonstration pseudo stop pattern. .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter selects each type of the demonstration pseudo stop pattern, which is a type corresponding to each type and which can be selected by the stop pattern selection counter. can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter is, for example, configured identically to the stop pattern selection counter included in the main control board 920 .

The first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter provided in the main control board 920 select the variation time, variation pattern, etc. of the variation display of the decorative design performed by the decorative design display device 479 when the special design starts winning ( Decide), whereas the first demonstration pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demonstration pseudo-variation type counter (both are part of the RAM in the sub control board 940), A counter for selecting the variation time, variation pattern, etc. of the variation display of the pseudo-decorative design performed for demonstration on the decorative design display device 479 when the pressing operation is performed on the depressing operation device during the non-game state. function as Various demonstration pseudo-variation type counters respectively generate various demonstration pseudo-variation pattern random numbers corresponding to various variation pattern random numbers.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various pseudo-variation type counters for demonstration use each type such as the variation time and variation pattern of the variation display of the pseudo-decorative pattern performed for demonstration, respectively. It is a corresponding type, and is configured to be selectable with the same selection probability as the selection probability of a type such as a fluctuation time or a fluctuation pattern that can be selected in various fluctuation type counters. Therefore, the first demonstration pseudo-fluctuation type counter to the fourth demonstration pseudo-fluctuation type counter are, for example, configured identically to the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter provided in the main control board 920. be done.

In addition, the pseudo winning random number counter for demonstration, the pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter for demonstration, the pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demonstration, and the first pseudo variation type counter for demonstration to the fourth pseudo variation type counter for demonstration are all , Each counter of the main control board 920 corresponding to each of these counters (that is, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counters), and need not necessarily have the same configuration as the counters of the main control board 920 corresponding to these counters.

Demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and first demonstration pseudo variation type counter to fourth demonstration pseudo variation type counter provided in the sub control board 940 are respectively provided in the main control board 920. The winning random number counter, the jackpot pattern random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are updated in the same way as the update. be.

In other words, the sub-control board 940 sets the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter, the demonstration pseudo-big hit pattern random number counter, and the demonstration pseudo-stop pattern selection counter, and the main control board 920 sets the special symbol in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process). Winning random number counter, jackpot symbol random number counter, and stop pattern selection counter are updated at intervals similar to the intervals at which the processing for updating (that is, random number update processing S1203 (see FIG. 12)) is performed.

In addition, the sub control board 940 sets the first demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counter to the fourth demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counter, and the main control board 920 sets the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter in the main processing. update processing (that is, update at intervals similar to the interval at which the variation counter update processing S1022 (see FIG. 11) is performed, and the main control board 920 performs the first variation in the timer interrupt processing (main control interrupt processing) The type counter to the fourth variation type counter are updated at the same interval as the interval at which the processing for updating (that is, the variation counter update processing S1205 (see FIG. 12) is executed.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 controls each of these counters (that is, a demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, a demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, a demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demonstration pseudo fluctuation At each update timing of the type counter to the fourth demonstration pseudo-fluctuation type counter), if the value of each counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576") of each counter, than the current value Change to a value that is greater by "1". On the other hand, when the value of each counter is the specified maximum value of each counter, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”) of each counter.

In addition, the above-mentioned demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demonstration pseudo variation type counters (first demonstration pseudo variation type counter to fourth demonstration pseudo-fluctuation type counter) does not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least part of the above counter may have another configuration.

For example, in the above configuration, the demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demo pseudo variation type counters are updated from a constant initial value. However, an initial value counter may be used to set the initial value (cyclic initial value) each time, or a random number generation IC may be used without using a program to refer to the value as needed. It is good as

Specifically, for example, the sub control board 940 has two types of random number initial value counters that function in the same manner as the special symbol winning random number initial value counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter provided by the main control board 920. Using these random number initial value counters, the setting of the circulating initial values of the demonstration pseudo winning random number counter and the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is performed by the winning random number initial value counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter related to special symbols. It is also possible to set the circulating initial value of the winning random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number counter related to the special symbol by setting the initial value in the same way as in the case of setting.

The sub control board 940, when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during the non-gaming state, the main control board 920 generates a winning random number related to the special symbol, a jackpot symbol random number, and, in the same way as in the case of obtaining the stop pattern random number, from the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter, the demonstration pseudo-jackpot pattern random number counter, and the demonstration pseudo-stop pattern selection counter, the demonstration pseudo-winning random number, the demonstration pseudo-jackpot pattern random And a pseudo stop pattern random number for demonstration is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the sub control board 940 .

The sub-control board 940 conducts a lottery (pseudo win-or-fail lottery) based on the acquired pseudo winning random number for demonstration in the same way as the main control board 920 carries out a special symbol lottery, and makes a pseudo win-or-fail decision.

In the pseudo lottery, when the demonstration pseudo-jackpot is won, the sub-control board 940 draws a jackpot symbol based on the acquired demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number. As in the case of determining the type, the type of a demonstration pseudo stop symbol (demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol) corresponding to the winning of the demonstration pseudo jackpot is determined. The types of the pseudo-big-hit symbols for demonstration in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment respectively correspond to the types of the big-hit symbols determined based on the big-hit symbol random numbers.

On the other hand, if the demonstration pseudo jackpot has not been won in the pseudo lottery, the sub control board 940 displays a demonstration pseudo stop symbol (demonstration pseudo A pseudo-losing pattern) is set as a stop pattern.

After the pseudo lottery, the sub control board 940 performs the demonstration based on the lottery result of the lottery, the value of the pseudo stop pattern random number for demonstration, and the value of various pseudo variation type counters for demonstration. The variation time of the variable display of the pseudo decorative symbols is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the variable display is selected.

In addition, the sub-control board 940 is configured to randomly determine the virtual number of times of suspension corresponding to the number of times of suspension of the unit game related to the special symbol, and the virtual game state. In addition to the value of the pseudo stop pattern random number for demonstration and the value of various pseudo variation type counters for demonstration, pseudo decorative patterns performed for demonstration using the determined virtual holding count and virtual gaming state The variation time of the variation display and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the variation display may be determined.

The sub-control board 940 determines the variation time of the variable display of the pseudo decorative symbols for demonstration and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the variable display, and then decorates the variable display of the pseudo decorative symbols. Start at the symbol display 479 . As a result, the display of the decorative design display device 479 is switched from the customer waiting effect to the variable display of the decorative design.

After starting the variable display of the pseudo decorative symbols for demonstration, the sub control board 940 performs the variable display of the decorative symbols with respect to the variable display at the variable time determined for the variable display. Continue according to the determined variation pattern. The sub-control board 940 confirms and displays the decoration symbol corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number as the variation time determined for the variation display elapses.

In addition, when the determined variation pattern is a specific ready-to-win display (for example, super ready-to-win) by decorative symbols, the sub-control board 940 selects a suggestive effect effect pattern. As a result, during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the suggestive effect of the selected effect pattern is displayed after the ready-to-win display.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is similar to various counters used to determine the contents of the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the start winning of the special symbols. Equipped with a pseudo demonstration counter (demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demonstration pseudo variation type counters) When the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during the game state, these pseudo demonstration counters are used to set the same selection conditions as when the special symbol starts winning (that is, each The winning probability or selection probability by the counter is the same, and the random number acquisition method from each counter is the same), and the variation pattern and the production pattern in the suggestive production are selected.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player presses the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-game state, which is the same as when a special symbol start winning occurs. A variable display (variable effect) according to the mode selected by the selection condition is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and the variable display can be visually recognized.

In addition, when the display of the decorative pattern display device 479 is switched from the customer waiting effect to the variable display by performing a predetermined pressing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-game state, the variable display If neither the pressing operation device nor the firing handle 252 is operated even after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the end of , the display of the decorative pattern display device 479 is switched to a customer waiting effect.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the so-called "customer waiting effect" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the non-game state is used for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display. It is composed of moving images or images that utilize moving image data that has been prepared in advance.

As a result, in the customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative design display device 479 during the non-game state, the moving image or the image included in the customer waiting effect can be obtained in the effect displayed on the decorative design display device 479 during the variable display. It is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the customer waiting effect recognize or guess the content of the effect part corresponding to the moving image or the image. For example, it is possible to make the player recognize the contents of the effect portion corresponding to the moving image based on the moving image cut out from the effect, and the effect corresponding to the moving image can be made based on the image cut out from the frame images constituting the effect. The player can guess the contents of the part. Therefore, the player's interest in the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 can be enhanced, thereby increasing the attention to the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the moving image data prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display is diverted to the customer waiting effect, the moving image data dedicated to the customer waiting effect is used. is not required, and the amount of memory required can be reduced accordingly. In addition, since there is no need to prepare dedicated video data for customer waiting effects, the development cost can be reduced accordingly.

Also, when preparing dedicated video data for the customer waiting effect, it may be necessary to lower the resolution of the customer waiting effect due to the storage capacity limit of the storage unit, but the effect displayed during the variable display Since it is a configuration that uses the moving image data for the customer waiting effect, it is possible to display the customer waiting effect with the same high resolution as the effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-game state, a special symbol (first special symbol, second 2 special design) is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 according to the mode selected under the same selection conditions as when the start winning of the special design is generated, it appears based on the start winning of the special design. The variable display can be made to appear in the non-game state with the same appearance probability as the appearance probability at the time of the start winning.

As a result, the player can, during the non-game state, in the actual game (that is, during the game), for example, what kind of variable display appears with what frequency (probability), special game state It is possible to simulate what kind of contents the variable display corresponds to the degree of expectation for the transition to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game characteristics brought about by the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, thereby increasing the attention to the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the period from when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the non-gaming state to the end of the variation display (variation effect), the sub control board 940 detects the start winning of the special symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which part of the functions that are executed during the period in which the variable display based on the starting prize ends is stopped (not executed).

For example, when the pressing operation device is operated during the non-gaming state, the sub-control board 940 performs the function to be executed during the period when the variable display based on the starting winning is finished after the starting winning of the special symbol occurs. Among them, at least the operation of a predetermined electric accessory that operates during variable display based on the variable display of decorative patterns, the fixed display of stopped patterns (for example, jackpot patterns) by decorative patterns (for example, a jackpot pattern), and the variable display based on the start winning of special patterns. 1 function may be stopped, so that at least a part of the presentation may not be performed.

Also, in the case where an input operation to the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 23) is enabled during the variable display, and a button effect is executed in which the effect accompanying the execution of the variable display changes depending on whether or not the input operation is performed. In addition, the button effect associated with the input operation may be made non-executable. For example, when a display prompting an input operation such as "Press the button" is displayed during the variable display, by invalidating the input operation to the input operation device 260, after the start winning of the special symbol occurs, the start A configuration may be adopted in which part of the functions that are executed during the period in which the variable display based on winnings ends is stopped.

In addition, when the fixed display of the stop pattern by the decorative pattern is stopped (that is, the fixed display of the stop pattern is not executed), the sub-control board 940 replaces the big win pattern suggesting that the big win has occurred. Display display (for example, a character string such as “Atari?” or “Lucky” that reminds you of a big win, or a pattern or image that reminds you of a big win (e.g., a character doing a guts pose)). It may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 479, and a display instead of a lost pattern suggesting that it has been lost (for example, a character string such as “sorry” that can remind you of the occurrence of a loss, or a A design or image (for example, a bowed character) that can be recalled may be displayed on the decorative design display device 479 .

In this way, by not executing a part of the effect, the period from when the pressing operation device is pressed during the non-game state to the end of the variable display, and from the start winning of the special symbol to the start There is a visual difference between the period in which the variable display based on winnings ends and part of the functions executed in the latter period are not executed in the former period. As a result, the variable display (variable effect) displayed when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the non-game state is displayed based on the start winning of the special symbol. Unlike , the player can be favorably recognized based on this difference that it is a pseudo variable display in which there is no possibility that a special game state will occur after the end of the variable display.

That is, when the player operates the pressing operation device in the non-game state, the player or the store clerk of the game hall, for example, changes display (variation) displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 based on the operation. It is possible to suppress the misunderstanding of an event that is impossible after the pseudo variable display, such as the occurrence of a special game state after the variable display with respect to the performance). As a result, the player or the store clerk of the game hall operates the pressing operation device during the non-playing state, thereby erroneously recognizing the post-variation display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, which should not occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of situations that are undesirable for the players and game arcade staff, such as expectations for the occurrence of the special game state.

In addition, as a variable display (variable effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the start winning of the special symbol occurs, a pushing operation device (for example, a pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a predetermined operable period )) is provided with a variable display capable of producing a predetermined suggestive effect (hereinafter, the variable display is also referred to as a “variable display configured to enable operation input”), When a variable display (a variable display configured to enable operation input) is displayed during a non-game state by a pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261, during the operable period of the variable display, by the control of the sub control board 940 , the push operation device 1261 moves up and down automatically (that is, without the player's operation) as if the pressing operation device 1261 had been pushed by the player (that is, so that the same change display appearance as if the pushing operation had been performed). It is good also as a structure which carries out.

Specifically, when a variable display configured to enable operation input is displayed during a non-game state (waiting), the motor 863 by the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 20) is displayed during the operable period of the variable display. The operating mechanism 860 is operated by the control of , whereby the pressing operation device 1261 automatically moves downward, which is the pressing direction (operating direction) of the pressing operation device 1261, from the neutral position. It may be configured to move upward and return to the neutral position. As a result, when the variable display configured to enable operation input is displayed by the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 during the non-game state, the player operates the pressing operation device during the operable period of the variable display. Such a situation can be simulated without the player actually operating the push operation device.

In such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to automatically move the pressing operation device 1261 up and down and then display a predetermined suggestive effect that can appear by pressing the pressing operation device 1261 . As a result, when a variable display configured to enable operation input is displayed by pressing the pressing operation device 1261 during a non-game state, the player can operate the pressing operation device during the operable period of the variable display. Then, the user can simulate what kind of suggestive effect will appear without actually operating the push-in operation device.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variable display configured to allow an operation input is provided as a variable display that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a start winning of a special symbol occurs, the player is in a non-game state. Since the variable display (variable display configured to enable operation input) can be experienced in a simulated manner, the variable display makes it possible to produce a predetermined suggestive effect by the player's participation such as operation of the push-in operation device. Since it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game characteristics brought about, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be improved thereby.

In addition, the predetermined suggestive effect that can appear by the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is actually executed based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261, limited to the case where the start winning of the special symbol occurs. can be done. For this reason, it is possible to add to the actual game executed based on the shooting of the game ball a game property in which a suggestive effect appears in response to the push-in operation, which cannot be obtained in a simulated experience, and a non-game state. It is possible to prompt the player who has visually recognized the variable display in the middle to start the game.

It should be noted that, during the display of the variable display based on the player's pressing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 during the non-game state, if the player presses on the pressing operation device, the secondary The control board 940 may be configured to end the non-gaming state. In this case, after the non-gaming state ends, the sub-control board 940, for example, changes the display content of the decorative design display device 479 to the content displayed before the non-gaming state starts (for example, the confirmation display by the decorative design 1621 ) is redisplayed.

When the non-gaming state ends, the variable display displayed during the non-gaming state also ends. can be easily terminated by pressing the pressing operation device during the variable display.

As a result, for example, while the player is displaying the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-game state, the player can operate the pressing operation device at the time when he or she sees the portion of the variable display that the player wants to see. By doing so, the variable display that is being displayed can be forcibly ended, so the game can be started early without waiting for the end of the display of the portion that is not necessary for the player.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment described above. When the push operation is performed on the push operation device such as the push operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23), it is the same as when the start winning of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs during the game. An example of the display mode of the decorative design display device 479 during the non-game state is shown in the configuration in which the variable display according to the mode selected by the selection condition is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 .

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the ninth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to eighth embodiments described above, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 25A is a screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative design display device 479 when the start winning of the special design (first special design, second special design) occurs. FIG. 25(B) shows a variable display screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-game state. It is a screen transition diagram showing an example of transition.

As shown in FIG. 25(A), when the start winning of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, it corresponds to the unit game right related to the special symbol generated based on the starting winning. Suspension display 1622 indicating the suspension of the right is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 before the start of the unit game related to the special design based on the start winning (that is, before the start of the variable display of the special design based on the start winning). be done. For example, as shown in FIG. 25A, the pending display 1622 is stopped and displayed on the lower side of the decorative design display device 479, specifically, before the start of the variable display of the special design based on the start winning of the special design. It is displayed below the decorative pattern 1621 that is present. Display control of the pending display 1622 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after the completion of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the period from the establishment of the starting condition to the start of the variable display (unit game) It has a function of suggesting to the player the degree of possibility (expectation) of transition to the special game state, and as an example of this function, the case where the pending display 1622 is used will be exemplified and explained.

The pending display 1622 indicates the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state set for the shape by its shape. For example, if the shape of the pending display 1622 is a star shape as shown in FIG. 25(A), the degree of expectation ( The degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state based on the start winning) is a predetermined value (for example, approximately 70%) set for the star shape.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hold displays 1622 with different shapes are prepared to be displayable, and the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state) that differs depending on the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622 is displayed. configured as shown.

For example, if the pending display 1622 is star-shaped, it indicates the highest degree of expectation (for example, about 70%) among all the shapes of the pending display 1622 that can be displayed, and if the pending display 1622 is an equilateral triangle shows a lower degree of expectation (for example, approximately 50%) than when the pending indication 1622 is a star shape, and when the pending indication 1622 is an inverted triangle, than when the pending indication 1622 is an equilateral triangle Shows a low degree of expectation (for example, approximately 30%), and the degree of expectation (for example, approximately 10%) is lower when the reservation indication 1622 is circular (round shape) than when the reservation indication 1622 is an inverted triangle. It is good also as a structure which shows. The player can relatively recognize the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state based on the difference in the shape of the pending display 1622 .

It should be noted that the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state by the suspension display 1622 does not necessarily have to be performed by the shape of the suspension display 1622, instead of the shape of the suspension display 1622, or in addition to the shape of the suspension display 1622. , elements other than the shape, such as the color of the suspension display 1622 and the display mode of the suspension display 1622 (for example, blinking) may be used.

The degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state set for each shape of the pending display 1622 is a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, The winning probability in the second special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table referred to when not winning in the special symbol lottery It is determined.

In addition, it may be configured to include a pending display 1622 having a shape indicating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state and a pending display 1622 having a shape that does not indicate the degree of expectation (unrelated to the degree of expectation). In such a case, the sub-control board 940 selects whether or not to suggest the degree of expectation with the pending display 1622 by a predetermined lottery, and if it is selected not to suggest the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation is indicated. When it is selected to display a pending display 1622 of a shape not shown (for example, a star shape, an equilateral triangle shape, etc.) and suggest the degree of expectation, a shape corresponding to the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state ( For example, it may be configured to display a circular pending display 1622 .

Further, the type of the pending display 1622 may have a function of changing the shape of the pending display 1622 from the shape of the pending display 1622 with a low degree of expectation to the shape of the pending display 1622 with a high degree of expectation.

In FIG. 25(A), when the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special design is zero, the start winning of the special design occurs, and accordingly, 1 pending display 1622 is displayed based on the occurrence of the starting winning. A case is shown as an example. The pending display 1622 is displayed one by one for each right of the unit game related to the special symbol.

It should be noted that, when the start winning of the special symbol is newly generated when the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol is 1 or more, the shape of the holding display 1622 corresponding to the new start winning is changed to the above-mentioned expectation degree. For example, the shape of the pending display 1622 corresponding to the new starting prize may be displayed temporarily (for example, for a predetermined period such as 30 seconds, or next time a special symbol starting prize occurs). It may be configured to display in a shape corresponding to the degree of expectation during the period until the game is played, or the period until one unit game right related to the pending special symbol is consumed.

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the start winning of the special symbol is started, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the pending display 1622 corresponding to the starting winning disappears and becomes invisible, and the decorative symbol 1621 Variable display is started. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25A, during the variable display of the decorative symbols 1621 (variable display of the special symbols), the suggestive display 1623 has a predetermined probability (for example, 30% or 60%). It may be a probability smaller than 100 such as % or may be 100%), and is displayed on the decorative design display device 479.

Like the pending display 1622, the suggestive display 1623 functions as a display showing the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state (degree of expectation for transition to the special game state) after the end of the unit game related to the special symbol. In other words, the suggestive display 1623 functions as a display that suggests the degree of possibility of transition to the special game state after the end of the variable display of the decoration symbol 1621 being executed. Display control of the suggestive display 1623 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

In the example shown in FIG. 25A, the suggestive display 1623 is configured in the shape of a balloon containing a comment such as "Super heat!". The suggestive display 1623 of the balloon shape indicates the degree of expectation (reliability) for transitioning to the special game state after the variable display during execution, depending on the content of the comment in the balloon (for example, "Super heat!", "Chance!", etc.). ). For example, if the content of the comment included in the speech balloon that constitutes the suggestive display 1623 is "Super heat!" as shown in FIG. It indicates that it is a predetermined value (for example, approximately 80%) set for the contents of the comment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestive displays 1623 with different comment contents are prepared so that they can be displayed. degrees). The player can relatively recognize the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state based on the difference in the contents of the comments in the suggestive display 1623 .

The degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state set for the content of the comment in the suggestion display 1623 is the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) performed based on the start winning of the special symbol corresponding to the suggestion display , second special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table referred to when not winning in the special symbol lottery determined by

The degree of expectation (magnitude of expectation) for transitioning to the special game state indicated by the suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative design display device 479 is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 before the suggestion display 1623. Hold display 1622 (that is, hold display 1622 based on the start winning of the same special symbol as the suggested display 1623) may be the same as the level of expectation to transition to the special game state shown, even if it is different. good.

Further, when the degree of expectation indicated by the suggestion display 1623 (the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state) is different from the level of the degree of expectation indicated by the hold display 1622 corresponding to the suggestion display 1623, the former is The latter may be a larger value, and the former may be a smaller value than the latter.

The suggestive display 1623 displayed on the decorative design display device 479 during the variable display of the decorative design 1621 (during the variable display of the special design) does not necessarily have to be a balloon shape as shown in FIG. 25(A). , it may be a character or the like indicating the degree of expectation for transitioning to a different special game state depending on the type, or may be a combination of the character and the above-described balloon, or may be a display of a still image. Alternatively, it may be a moving image in which the movement of the character or the characters in the balloon are gradually displayed.

When the ready-to-win display occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern 1621, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment described above, after displaying the ready-to-win display, a predetermined probability (for example, 100 such as 30% or 60%) With a smaller probability (or 100%), the suggestive effect of the appearance of the predetermined character is executed. Display control of the suggestion effect is executed by the sub control board 940 . In addition, the suggestive effect in which a predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only in a specific ready-to-win display such as a so-called super ready-to-win display, or may be displayed before the ready-to-win display. Well, it may be displayed after the starting prize is won and before the unit game is started.

As with the first suggestive effect of the fifth embodiment, the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display is prepared with a plurality of types of effect patterns corresponding to the degree of expectation (reliability) for the transition to the special game state. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state set for each effect pattern is the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special lottery) based on the start winning of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display It is determined by the winning probability in the symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table referred to when not winning in the special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each effect pattern in the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display is configured to differ according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state set for the effect pattern. Examples of patterns include a plurality of types of characters having different modes such as character types, clothes, belongings, and actions.

For example, when a character CA11 holding a sword in his right hand appears in the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display, the degree of expectation for the subsequent transition to the special game state is set to a predetermined value set for the character CA11 (for example, , approximately 90%). The player can relatively recognize the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state based on the type of character that appears in the suggestive effect.

When the suggestive effect is executed after the reach display in the variable display of the decorative pattern 1621, after the end of the suggestive effect, it corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed based on the start winning of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display. The confirmation display of the decorative design 1621 to be played is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 . For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed based on the start winning of the special symbol corresponding to the ready-to-win display is a big hit, the decorative symbol 1621 is "777" as shown in FIG. 25(A). Confirmation is displayed.

When the start winning of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs during the game, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponding to the variation pattern selected based on the value of various variation type counters, etc. It is displayed from the beginning to the end (fixed display) at the variation display time (variation time) corresponding to the selected variation pattern. In other words, when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game, the period (time) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponds to the variation pattern of the variation display (that is, the selected variation pattern). is a variable time.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during the non-game state (standby), the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment Similarly, the variable display selected under the same selection conditions as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a pseudo variable display for demonstration.

In addition, the selection condition of the variable display when the pressing operation to the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-game state, and the selection condition of the variable display when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game is not necessarily the same or substantially the same, and the selection conditions for the variable display are when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state and when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game. Different configurations are possible.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-game state, a variation pattern selected under the same selection conditions as when a start winning of a special symbol occurs during a game. The period (time) from the start (first) to the end (fixed display at the end of the variable display) of the variable display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) of the decorative pattern 1621 corresponding to the variable display is a period (time) shorter than the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 25(B), when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, after displaying the pending display 1622, a pseudo variable display for demonstration by the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed. , and during the period from the start of the variable display to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display, the variable display is the period corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize of the special symbol (i.e., the start of the special symbol By making the display faster than the period from the start of the variable display based on the winning to the appearance of the suggested effect after the ready-to-win display (that is, by increasing the playback speed of the video), a pseudo-variable display for demonstration purposes can be made shorter than the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation display.

In addition, the time from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state (that is, the pseudo variable display for demonstration) to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display is the special symbol. As a specific example of setting the time period shorter than the corresponding period in the variable display based on the start winning, for example, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, the variable display based on the pressing operation (i.e. , Pseudo variable display for demonstration), the content displayed during the period from the start to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display is displayed from the start of the variable display based on the start of the special symbol to the reach display It may be configured to display at a higher speed than the variable display during the period until the suggestive effect appears (that is, to speed up the reproduction speed of the moving image compared to the case where the start winning of the special symbol occurs).

Alternatively, for example, when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-game state, of the variable display based on the pressing operation, a suggestion effect after the start of the variable display and the ready-to-win display is performed. The display of the content to be displayed until it appears may be omitted (that is, the suggestion effect after the ready-to-win display is displayed after the start of the variable display).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display is displayed in the pseudo variable display for demonstration (that is, the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-game state) In addition, two or more suggestive effects with different expectations for the transition to the special game state according to the display content (that is, as a variable display based on the starting winning, a variable display that is executed separately by two starting winnings 2 or more suggestive effects that can be displayed by ) are configured to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 at the same time. The display control is executed by the sub-control board 940. FIG.

For example, when a plurality of types of characters with different expectations for the transition to the special game state are prepared as characters that can appear during the suggestive effect, at least some of the plurality of types of characters are Two or more suggesting effects appearing are configured to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 at the same time.

Specifically, for example, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state, the suggestion after the ready-to-win display in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern When four types of characters CA11 to CA14 with different expectations for the transition to the special game state are prepared as characters that can appear in the production, these four types of characters are shown in FIG. Suggestive effects including CA11 to CA14 are respectively displayed in respective display areas 479D to 479G obtained by dividing the display area of the decorative design display device 479 vertically and horizontally into four areas.

As a result, two or more suggestive performances with different expectations for the transition to the special game state according to the type of characters that appear each constitute the variable display like the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbols. The image (frame image) to be displayed is displayed simultaneously in each of the display areas 479D to 479G in a reduced size compared to the case where it is displayed all over the display area of the decorative design display device 479.

It should be noted that, as a suggestive effect (suggestive effect after reach) that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the selected variation pattern and has different expectations for the transition to the special game state, the four types of characters described above are not necessarily , but may be three or less, or five or more.

In addition, the number of suggestive effects (suggestive effects after reach) that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern and have different expectations for the transition to the special game state is reached in the decorative pattern display device 479. If the number of display areas divided to display each subsequent suggestive effect (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25B) is greater than It is also possible to select and display only the number that can be displayed in the displayed display area.

In addition, the number of display areas divided to display each suggestive effect after reach in the decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, and may be three or less or five or more. may In addition, the number of display areas divided to display each suggestive effect after reach in the decorative pattern display device 479 depends on the selected variation pattern (that is, the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern is currently displayed. It may be a configuration that is variable (according to the number of possible post-reach suggestive effects).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, before the start of the simulated variation display for demonstration, As shown, a pending display 1622 is displayed as a pseudo pending display corresponding to the pseudo variable display. More specifically, two or more shapes of pending display 1622 that are at least part of the plurality of shapes of pending display 1622 that differ according to the degree of expectation (magnitude of expectation) for the transition to the special game state. (Two or more types of pending display 1622) are configured to be displayed on the decorative design display device 479 at the same time. The display control is executed by the sub-control board 940. FIG.

For example, four types of shapes (for example, star shape, equilateral triangle shape, inverted triangle shape, and circular shape) are prepared as the shape of the pending display 1622 according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state. 25(B), these four kinds of pending displays 1622 are displayed by dividing the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 before the start of the pseudo-varying display for demonstration. are simultaneously displayed in areas 479D-479G.

As a result, the display image including two or more types of hold displays 1622 with different expectations for the transition to the special game state depending on the shape of the display image is changed to the variable display like the variable display based on the start winning of different symbols. are displayed simultaneously in each of the display areas 479D to 479G in a reduced size compared to the case where the images (frame images) constituting the decorative pattern display device 479 are displayed all over the display area.

The number of pending displays 1622 of different shapes is the number of display areas divided to display the pending displays 1622 of each shape in the decorative pattern display device 479 (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25(B) ), it may be possible to select and display as many pending displays 1622 of different shapes as can be displayed in the divided display area.

In addition, the number of display areas divided to display the pending display 1622 having different shapes in the decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, and may be three or less or five or more. may In addition, the number of display areas divided for displaying the pending display 1622 having different shapes in the decorative pattern display device 479 and the number of display areas divided for displaying each character that can appear in the suggestive effect are They do not necessarily have to be the same, and the former number and the latter number may be different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, as shown in FIG. (Pseudo variable display for demo) is displayed after the end of pseudo fixed display for demonstration (more specifically, a symbol corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the pseudo jackpot symbol random number for demonstration). Confirmed display of decorative pattern 1621 consisting of a combination of) is displayed on decorative pattern display device 479 in a smaller size than confirmed display by decorative pattern 1621 (see FIG. 25A) displayed after the end of variable display based on the start winning of special patterns Is displayed. Display control of the size of the confirmed display is performed by the sub control board 940 .

Further, when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, as shown in FIG. A display 1624 is displayed that includes information that reminds one of the. Display control of the display 1624 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

A player who visually recognizes the display 1624 confirms that the decorative design 1621 displayed on the decorative design display device 479 is displayed based on the content of the display 1624 (that is, the information that enables the user to remember that the player is in a non-gaming state). , it can be recognized that it is not the final display displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbol, but the pseudo final display for demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 25(B), the display 1624 is configured to include the character string "demonstrating" as information that can remind the player that he or she is in a non-game state. It may be a character string different from "demonstrating" as long as it is a character string that reminds one of the character string. In addition, the information included in the display 1624 that enables the user to recall the non-gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-described character string such as "demonstrating", and the non-gaming state can be recalled. It may be a simple pattern or pattern (for example, a pattern such as a cross mark).

Further, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, after the variation display based on the pressing operation (pseudo variation display for demonstration) is completed, a simulated demonstration by the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed. Instead of the actual final display, a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo final display for demonstration is performed by an alternative display 1625 that does not include the decorative pattern 1621, as shown in FIG. 25(B). Display control of the alternative display 1625 is performed by the sub-control board 940 .

The alternative display 1625 includes a display that substitutes for the jackpot symbol suggesting that a big win has occurred, and a display that substitutes for the losing symbol that suggests that the game has been lost.

As the alternative display 1625 that replaces the big win pattern suggesting that the big win has occurred, for example, a character string such as "Atari?" Examples include patterns and images (for example, a character doing a fist pose as shown in FIG. 25B).

On the other hand, as the alternative display 1625 that replaces the lost pattern suggesting that the failure occurred, for example, a character string such as "sorry" that can remind the occurrence of the failure, or a pattern or image that can remind the occurrence of the failure. (for example, a bowed character, etc.) and the like are exemplified.

Next, the actions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-game state, a hold display that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state by its shape. 1622 and the variable display including the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display can be displayed as a pseudo variable display for demonstration, so even if the start winning of the special symbol does not occur (the starting winning of the special symbol does not occur ), the player can see what kind of display is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, such as the suggestive effect after reach and the hold display 1622. .

Therefore, it is possible to display a variable display including a display that can suggest the degree of expectation such as a suggestive effect after reach as a variable display based on the start winning of the special symbol, or when the start winning of the special symbol occurs In the configuration in which the degree of expectation can be suggested by the pending display 1622 for the starting winning, an event that can be expected after the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special game state) It is possible to improve the playability inferred from the content of the variable display, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, for example, as shown in FIG. The time from the start of the pseudo variable display to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display appears, and the time from the start of the variable display to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display in the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbol. By displaying it in a shorter time than the time of , the pseudo-changing display for the demonstration can be displayed in a time shorter than the changing display time (fluctuation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the changing display. can.

Therefore, as a selectable variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to a variation display including a display (effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, such as a suggestive effect after reach, is prepared. , the player can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, which is included in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern, by operating the pressing operation device (pressing operation) during the non-game state. display (for example, suggestive effect after ready-to-win display) can be efficiently viewed within a time shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern (that is, the variable display including the variable display). .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, for example, as shown in FIG. Before starting the display, a pending display 1622 is displayed that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state by its shape. Therefore, by pressing the pressing operation device in the non-game state, the player can display the display image including the holding display 1622 having a predetermined shape before (at the start) of the pseudo-variation display for demonstration. can be visually recognized. As described above, the pseudo-variation display for demonstration is configured to be shorter than the variation time of the variation display based on the start winning of the special symbols. By displaying a display image including a display (for example, a pending display 1622) that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to , the display that can suggest the degree of expectation can also be efficiently visually recognized by the player. becomes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display is displayed in the variable display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, Two or more suggestive effects having different expectations for the transition to the special game state are simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 according to the display contents.

As a result, the player presses the push operation device during the non-game state, thereby increasing the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the same pattern (for example, super reach). Two or more indications that can be suggested (for example, suggestion effects after ready-to-win display) can be collectively visually recognized at the same time. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference between two or more displays that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the same pattern during the non-game state. Therefore, during the game, it is possible to play the game while being conscious of the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, a special Two or more types of pending displays 1622 with different expectations for the transition to the game state are configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at the same time.

As a result, the player can collectively visually recognize the two or more types of hold displays 1622 at the same time by pressing the pressing operation device during the non-game state. Therefore, during the non-game state, it is possible to efficiently recognize the difference in the shape of the pending display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the pseudo-variation display for demonstration. It is possible to play the game while being conscious of the difference in the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state according to the difference in the shape of the pending display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, within a period from the start to the end of the variation display (pseudo variation display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state (that is, the variation During execution of display) or before the start of the variable display (at the start), such as a display image including a suggestive effect after reach or a display image including a hold display 1622, suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state. The possible display is reduced to a smaller size compared to the case where the image (frame image) constituting the variable display is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative design display device 479 like the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbol. displayed in the correct size.

As a result, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state, such as the display image of the suggestive effect after reach and the display image including the pending display 1622, which is displayed based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state. that the display capable of suggesting that the special game state is not likely to occur after the display (more specifically, after the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state), Based on the display size, the player can be appropriately recognized.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-game state, the variation display based on the pressing operation (pseudo variation display for demonstration) ends. A pseudo-determined display for demonstration by the decorative pattern 1621 to be displayed later is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in a smaller size than the finalized display by the decorative pattern 1621 to be displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start winning of the special pattern. be done.

Therefore, even in this point, there is a possibility that the special game state will occur after the variable display (more specifically, after the pseudo confirmation display for demonstration is displayed) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state. Based on the display size of the pseudo-determined display for demonstration, the player can be made to preferably recognize that there is no such display.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 26, a tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment, the display mode of the variable display and the fixed display displayed on the decorative design display device 479 when the special design (the first special design, the second special design) starts winning. devised.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the tenth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to ninth embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment.

FIG. 26 (FIGS. 26A and 26B) is a screen diagram showing an example of variable display and fixed display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as one mode of variable display executed when a special symbol start winning occurs, a game machine image 1701 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as shown in FIG. is displayed as if it were displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine (hereinafter, the variable display is also referred to as "variable display using game machine images").

The variable display using the game machine image is executed with a predetermined selection probability set for the variable display when a variable pattern corresponding to the variable display is selected when the start winning of the special symbol occurs. (display) is selected. The selection probability may be a value greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%. In addition, the variable display using the game machine image is selected (displayed, executed) with a predetermined selection probability only when it is a variable pattern that accompanies a specific reach display (for example, super reach). may be

A variable display using a gaming machine image includes a gaming machine image 1701 and a player image 1702, as shown in FIG. The sub control board 940 performs the display control of the variable display using the game machine image including the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 .

The gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 played by a player). The gaming machine image 1701 is preferably displayed as a reduced image of a pachinko machine having the same shape as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, etc. In the example shown in FIG. shown in Also, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the game machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine seen from the diagonally front left side. Note that the pachinko machine shown by the gaming machine image 1701 does not necessarily have to be a pachinko machine viewed obliquely from the front, and may be a pachinko machine viewed from the front.

The variable display using the game machine image is displayed on the display screen of the display device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine indicated by the game machine image 1701 in the game machine image 1701 . Therefore, when the game machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine seen from the oblique front side (for example, the left oblique front side) as shown in FIG. The variable display is obliquely displayed in a substantially parallelogram area 1701A corresponding to the substantially rectangular display screen of the pachinko machine display device (the display device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 479) indicated by the gaming machine image 1701 in the machine image 1701. It is displayed as if viewed from the front side.

It should be noted that the variable display that can be displayed (appearable) for the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display using the game machine image may be a configuration in which only the variable display using the game machine image is used. In addition to the variable display using images, the configuration may include other variable display (for example, the variable display shown in FIG. 25A) in which the gaming machine image 1701 is not displayed. In the following description, another variable display that does not display the gaming machine image 1701 is also simply referred to as "another variable display".

The player image 1702 is an image corresponding to the player positioned in front of the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701 . The player image 1702 (image corresponding to the player) may be a drawn character image representing the player, as shown in FIG. It may be a photographed image of the person photographed by a camera or the like provided in the pachinko machine 100 .

When the start winning of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs and execution of variable display using gaming machine images is selected, as shown in FIG. In a region 1701A (a region corresponding to the display screen of the display device of the pachinko machine shown by the game machine image 1701) in the game machine image 1701 displayed on the symbol display device 479, a variable display using the game machine image is started. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 26(A), the state in which the decorative pattern 1621 is fluctuating is illustrated.

In the variable display using the game machine image, the fixed display is displayed after the variable display time (variation time) for the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display has elapsed after the variable display is started. Even if the confirmation display is configured to display a combination of the decorative patterns 1621 corresponding to the lottery results of the special pattern lottery (the first special pattern lottery, the second special pattern lottery), the lottery result is displayed by the alternative display 1625. It may be configured to In the example shown in FIG. 26(B), an alternative display 1625 (specifically, an alternative display 1625 by a character doing a guts pose) that replaces the jackpot symbol indicating that a big win has occurred is the confirmed display. The displayed state is illustrated.

The variable displays that can be displayed for the variable patterns corresponding to the variable display using the gaming machine image are the variable display using the gaming machine image and other variable displays (that is, other variable displays that do not display the gaming machine image 1701). display), video data (image data) corresponding to variable display using game machine images is not specially prepared, and video data corresponding to other variable displays is diverted to the game machine. It may be configured to display a variable display using an image. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that dedicated moving image data corresponding to variable display using game machine images is prepared.

Specifically, an image (unit image) of each frame constituting moving image data corresponding to another variable display is deformed or reduced so that the image has a shape that matches the shape of the region 1701A, which is a substantially parallelogram. After performing the processing, a series of moving images (images) composed of the processed images are sequentially displayed in the area 1701A. As a result, the variable display using the game machine image can be displayed in the area 1701A without specially preparing moving image data corresponding to the variable display using the game machine image. In addition, the control of the processing (deformation, reduction, etc.) of the image of each frame described above, and the display control of the moving image composed of the processed image (that is, the variable display using the game machine image) are performed by the sub control board 940.

When displaying a variable display using a game machine image by diverting moving image data corresponding to another variable display, the content of the variable display using the game machine image is changed to another variable display corresponding to the diverted source moving image data. , but the variable display (including fixed display) using game machine images is processed by transforming or reducing the frame images that make up the video data corresponding to other variable displays. Since it is composed of images, it is a variable display having a display mode different from that of other variable displays.

Therefore, by displaying the variable display using the game machine image by using the moving image data corresponding to other variable display, the amount of storage of the moving image data (image data) is suppressed, and the variable display mode (display mode) ) variations can be increased. In addition, it is possible to easily reduce the need to develop multiple types of variable displays, such as variable displays using game machine images and other variable displays, and suggestive effects that appear in each of these multiple types of variable displays. Development costs can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the final display is performed in the variable display using the game machine image, the player image 1702 indicates the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final display. It is a configuration suggested by the state of

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, when performing the confirmation display corresponding to the lottery result, as shown in FIG. A player image 1702 corresponding to a player who is smiling or doing a fist pose is displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (not a big hit), when the determination display corresponding to the lottery result is performed, a state that can remind the occurrence of a loss (for example, the player hangs his head). , etc.) is displayed.

In addition to the configuration of suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the confirmed display by the state of the player indicated by the player image 1702 when performing the confirmed display in the variable display using the game machine image, Alternatively, instead of the configuration, after the ready-to-win display in the variable display using the game machine image, the degree of possibility of transition to the special game state after the end of the variable display (expectation degree for transition to the special game state), The configuration may be suggested by the state of the player indicated by the player image 1702 . For example, depending on the facial expression of the player indicated by the player image 1702, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state may be changed.

Further, for example, according to the state of the player indicated by the player image 1702, the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state) in the suggestive effect displayed on the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701 is configured to differ. may be For example, the player image 1702 corresponding to the player with a larger fist pose (higher hand raised) may be displayed as the degree of expectation in the suggestive effect is higher. It is also possible to display the player image 1702 corresponding to the player whose head is lowered as the height is lower. As a result, the player image 1702 can easily suggest the highly anticipated effect of transitioning to the special game state.

Also, depending on the movement and state of the player indicated by the player image 1702, during the variable display in which operations can be input by various input operation devices 260 including the pressing operation device 1261, etc. , the operation method of the input operation device 260, the timing of the operation (operation timing), and the result of the operation (for example, appearance of a character, change in display content, etc.).

In addition, the variable display including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 is part of the variable display executed in the variable display during the non-game state in the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment (for example, a stop symbol is displayed). It may be used to display a part including the final part of the variable display) or to display all of the variable display. It is possible to present it in an easy-to-understand manner to the store clerk of the game arcade.

Further, the variable display including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 may be displayed together with the suggestive effect when the suggestive effect is displayed in the customer waiting effect in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. , the action of the player in the player image 1702 can be suggested in an easy-to-understand manner.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 displays the game machine image 1701, which is the image corresponding to the pachinko machine, and the game machine image 1701 when the start winning of the special symbol occurs. A player image 1702, which is an image corresponding to a player positioned on the front side of the pachinko machine indicated by , is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and the pachinko machine indicated by the game machine image 1701 in the game machine image 1701 is equipped with In the area corresponding to the display screen of the display device, the contents of other variable display that can be displayed when the start winning of the special symbol occurs are displayed.

Therefore, a player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 100 can see the action and state of the player (player image 1702) who plays a game on the pachinko machine (game machine image 1701) displayed in the decorative pattern display device 479. , the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state for the current variable display displayed based on the starting prize of the special symbol, the player's emotion according to the degree of expectation indicated by the suggestive effect, and the operation method for the pachinko machine. Various information can be transmitted to the player.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when a special symbol starting prize is won, a variable display using a game machine image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but during a non-game state ( During standby), when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pressed and the execution of the variable display using the game machine image is selected, the game is played in the same manner as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs. A variable display using a machine image may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 .

A variable display using a game machine image (a variable display including a game machine image 1701 and a player image 1702) is displayed during a non-gaming state. 1701) displayed in the pachinko machine (game machine image 1701). and can know how to operate the pachinko machine before playing the game.

Further, when displaying the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 on the decorative symbol display device 479, the sub-control board 940 displays at least one of the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Depending on whether or not is a big hit, at least a part thereof may be displayed differently. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player the lottery result of the special symbol lottery by at least a partial difference in at least one of the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 displays the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in a predetermined manner (for example, a combination of three symbols) when a special symbol starting prize is won. and a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, a combination of three symbols corresponding to the lottery result including the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 is deformed or reduced). Display mode with processing such as processing) to display the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, or a predetermined image that is an image with different content from the lottery result of the predetermined mode and corresponds to the jackpot winning (for example, Guts A second lottery result display control for displaying an alternative display 1625) by a paused character can be executed.

Therefore, the lottery results displayed by the second lottery result display control differ from the lottery results displayed by the first lottery result display control in terms of display mode or content. It is possible to increase the variation of the display, and to make it difficult to grasp the lottery result by deforming, reducing, or changing the content of the image. Thereby, when the lottery result is displayed, it is possible to provide the game property of paying attention to the lottery result.

In particular, as exemplified in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine image 1701 corresponding to the pachinko machine viewed from the oblique front side is used, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is also displayed when viewed from the oblique front side. Therefore, the display of the lottery result can be preferably made difficult to grasp.

In addition, when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during the non-game state (waiting) and the execution of the variable display using the game machine image is selected, the start winning of the special symbol is performed. In the case of a configuration in which a variable display using a game machine image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 as in the case where the pachinko machine 100 is configured to display the lottery result, when the lottery result is displayed, the game to watch the lottery result It is possible to grasp in advance, such as before a game, that the player has the property.

In the tenth embodiment described above, all the contents of the other variable display are displayed in the variable display using the game machine image. It is not limited to being displayed in the variable display, but may be configured such that only part of the contents of other variable display (for example, only the suggestive effect) is displayed in the variable display using the game machine image.

Further, when a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during a non-game state (during standby), a variable display is executed by lottery result display control using the game machine image and the player image, and a special display is performed. When a starting winning of a symbol occurs, the lottery result may be displayed by normal lottery result display control using a combination of three symbols.

Further, when displaying the game machine image and the player image together with the variable display image, the portion where the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols is displayed (for example, the portion where the number symbols are displayed) The pattern may be displayed in the same place and in the same manner (appearance) as when the game machine image is not displayed without changing the direction of the pattern and deforming it. The sub-control board 940 may perform control so that the image is displayed obliquely according to the orientation of the image.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment, as a variable display (variable effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the start winning of the special symbol occurs, a variable display (that is, In a configuration in which a variable display capable of producing a predetermined effect is provided by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period, the player can preferably operate the pressing operation device. devised.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the eleventh embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to tenth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment.

27 (FIGS. 27(A) and 27(B)) are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during an operable period in the variable display configured to enable operation input in the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents.

In FIG. 27A, for reference, the right hand 1712C is shown by a dashed line as the hand touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A whose operation surface is located at the neutral position.

Here, the "operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A" is a surface corresponding to the surface that the player touches when operating the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1712A. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 1712A, which is an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 that can be pressed downward, the upper side surface (upper end surface) of the pressing operation device 1712A becomes the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, during the operable period of the variable display configured to enable operation input, a predetermined effect appears by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261. (For example, an effect that causes a predetermined change in response to the pressing operation), an effect image 1712 corresponding to an effect related to the movement of the pressing operation device 1261, and information related to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261. Display information 1713 corresponding to (for example, character information by a character string such as "continuous press!" and "PUSH!") is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

The effect image 1711 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) including images corresponding to a character 1711A, a balloon 1711B, and a foot pump 1711C for sending air into the balloon 1711B. The effect image 1711 is a moving image corresponding to an effect in which the character 1711A steps on the foot pump 1711C in response to the pressing operation performed on the pressing operation device during the operable period, thereby inflating the balloon 1711B. Moving image data corresponding to the effect image 1711 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub control board 940 , and display control of the effect image 1711 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect by the effect image 1711 is configured as a suggestive effect indicating the degree of expectation for the subsequent transition to the special game state by the size of the gradually inflating balloon 1711B until the balloon 1711B bursts. be done. For example, the greater the size of the balloon 1711B when the balloon 1711B bursts, the higher the expectations for the transition to the special game state.

The effect image 1712 includes an image (more specifically, an image corresponding to a pressing operation device 1712A corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 and a hand (eg, left hand) 1712B touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. , moving images).

More specifically, the effect image 1712 changes from the state in which the left hand 1712B touches the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A whose operation surface is located at the neutral position (see FIG. 27A) to the movement of the left hand 1712B (lower side). After pushing the pressing device 1712A downward (see FIG. 27(B)), the pressing device 1712A moves upward until the operating surface of the pressing device 1712A reaches the neutral position. This is a moving image corresponding to an effect in which the reciprocating motion is performed at least once (repeated multiple times).

If the effect image 1712 is an image corresponding to the case where the left hand 1712B pushes downward the pressing operation device 1712A whose operation surface is positioned at the neutral position as shown in FIG. and "(PUSH!)" are displayed as the display information 1713, and the effect image 1712 is in a state where the pressing operation device 1712A is pushed downward as shown in FIG. 27(B). If it is a corresponding image, the character information is displayed as the display information 1713 by the character strings "Continuously press!"

As a result, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A is positioned at the neutral position, the player refers to the character information "(PUSH!)" When the player can recognize that it is necessary to push the push operation device 1712A downward, the player refers to the character information "(again)" in the display information 1713. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A needs to be pushed repeatedly.

Therefore, the player can recognize that it is necessary to repeatedly perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1712A in response to the character information "continuously press!" displayed as the display information 1713.

When the reaction force to the pressing operation device 1261 is output by electric power of the motor 863 or the like, the degree of change in the operation feeling in the pressing operation is determined by the player. Rather than hitting the button operation unit 850, the player can control the difference in operation feeling by pressing the button operation unit 850 while touching the button operation unit 850. It is preferable because it can be easily perceived. Therefore, it is preferable to display the operation method for the pressing operation device 1261 on the screen by the display information 1713 or the like, so that the player can easily understand the effect intended by the developer. can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left hand 1712B touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A moves downward while performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1712A. Since the display on the device 479 is controlled, the contents of the displayed effect image 1712 can suggest to the player how to operate the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1712A.

Note that in the effect image 1712, the left hand 1712B does not necessarily have to touch (contact) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. It may be a configuration that

Further, when the reaction force to the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is configured to be variable, the left hand 1712B is the only hand touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A depending on the magnitude of the reaction force. and the effect image 1712 corresponding to the case where both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C (one-dot chain line) are touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. .

For example, in a configuration in which the reaction force increases as the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state increases, the greater the reaction force (that is, the greater the degree of expectation), the more likely the user is touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. By increasing the number of hands (that is, increasing only the left hand 1712B to both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C), a special game state is entered according to the number of hands touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. It is possible to easily suggest the degree of expectation for the transition of .

Note that the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above may be applied when the pressing operation device 261 is used as the pressing operation device instead of the pressing operation device 1261 .

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, as a variable display (variable effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the start winning of the special symbol occurs, a variable display (that is, In a configuration in which a variable display capable of producing a predetermined effect is provided by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period, similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment described above, It is devised so that the player can suitably operate the pressing operation device.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the twelfth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to eleventh embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment.

28 (FIGS. 28(A) and 28(B)) are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during an operable period in the variable display configured to enable operation input in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents.

In FIG. 28A, for reference, the pressing operation device actually provided in the pachinko machine 100 and the pressing operation device 1715A, which is actually included in the pachinko machine 100, is shown in relation to the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A drawn as an image in the effect image 1715. The position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the operation device 1715A is indicated by a dashed line XA.

Here, the "operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A" is a surface corresponding to the surface that the player touches when operating the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 1715A, which is an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 that can be pressed downward, the upper side surface (upper end surface) of the pressing operation device 1715A becomes the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, during the operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input, the effect image 1711 similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment described above and The display information 1713 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 and the effect image 1715 corresponding to the effect regarding the movement of the pressing operation device 1261 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 .

The effect image 1715 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) including an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261. FIG. More specifically, the effect image 1715 is displayed after the pressing operation device 1715A moves downward (see FIG. 28B) from the state in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is positioned at the neutral position (see FIG. 28A). )) is a moving image corresponding to an effect in which a series of reciprocating motions in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A moves upward (rises) until it reaches the neutral position is performed at least once (repeated multiple times). .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A drawn as an image in the effect image 1715 is located at the neutral position, the operation surface moves from the position Q1 to the reference position Q0 (for example, pressing operation The distance LA to the position of at least a part of the periphery of the opening corresponding to the opening R (see FIG. 24) accommodating the device 1261 is the pressing operation device actually provided in the pachinko machine 100 and the pressing operation device 1715A. is longer than the distance LB from the position Q2 of the operation surface to the reference position Q0 when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to is positioned at the neutral position. The ratio of the distance LA to the distance LB is, for example, preferably approximately 1.2 times or more, preferably approximately 1.5 times or more, and approximately 2 times or more.

In a configuration in which the operation surface of pressing operation device 1261 is positioned at a predetermined neutral position, an image corresponding to pressing operation device 1715A having position Q1 corresponding to the neutral position (position Q2) as the neutral position of the operation surface is displayed as a secondary image. It is prepared in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM of the control board 940, and the sub control board 940 executes display control of the effect image 1715 using the image.

In addition, in the configuration in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can be positioned at a plurality of types of neutral positions, the plurality of types of pressing operation devices 1715A having different neutral positions (positions Q2) corresponding to different positions Q1 are provided. It may be configured to prepare a corresponding image. In this configuration, the sub-control board 940 determines the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface is located at the neutral position, based on the detection result of the encoder provided in the operating mechanism 860 of the pressing operation device 1261. A configuration may be employed in which display control of the effect image 1715 is executed using the image of the pressing operation device 1715A corresponding to the detected position.

Alternatively, when the neutral position changes, the sub-control board 940 constantly detects the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position, and the position corresponding to the detected position becomes the neutral position of the operation surface. A configuration in which the pressing operation device 1715A is drawn in the effect image 1715 may be employed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed when the pressing operation device 1715A (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A) reciprocates vertically in the effect image 1715 is It is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed when the actual pressing operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) corresponding to 1715A reciprocates vertically. The ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 is, for example, preferably approximately 1.5 or more, preferably approximately 2 or more, and approximately 3 or more. preferred.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed when the pressing operation device 1261 moves vertically under the control of the sub-control board 940, and the ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261. and a ratio greater than approximately 1 is set in advance. display control is executed for the effect image 1715 so as to reciprocate to .

Alternatively, a ratio of the reciprocating speed of the depressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the depressing operation device 1261, which is greater than approximately 1, is defined in advance, and the control board 940 detects that the depressing operation has been performed on the depressing operation device 1261. In this case, the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 is detected based on the detection result by the encoder provided in the actuating mechanism 860 of the pressing operation device 1261, and the pressing operation device 1715A displays the detected reciprocating speed in the effect image 1715. and the ratio defined in advance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the effect image 1715, a part of the side surface of the pressing operation device 1715A (for example, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is positioned at the neutral position, the player can see the The lower end side of the area) is configured to display the expectation information 1715B capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state with a predetermined probability.

The expectation level information 1715B may be information including, for example, a character string (for example, "Hot!" It may be an image that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the state (for example, an image of a character with each facial expression according to the degree of expectation). A plurality of types of expectation level information 1715B are prepared according to the suggested level of expectation. In the example shown in FIG. 28A, the expectation level information 1715B is composed of a character string "hot!" that can suggest that the expectation level for the transition to the special game state is relatively high.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is located at a predetermined neutral position, the distance from the position (position Q1) of the operation surface to the reference position (position Q0) is The distance LA is longer than the distance LB from the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (position Q2) to the reference position when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is positioned at the predetermined neutral position. The reciprocating speed when the operation surface of 1715A reciprocates in the vertical direction is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when the start winning of the special symbol occurs and the variable display configured to enable operation input is selected, the sub-control board 940 can operate the pressing operation device 1261 during the operable period of the pressing operation device 1261. The position of the operation surface of 1715A differs from the displacement amount of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940, or the reciprocating motion different from the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940. A moving image (effect image 1715) including at least one aspect of speed can be displayed. As a result, the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that the sub control board 940 performs control to change the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by operating the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the effect image 1715 (moving image) is displayed on the display unit. It is good also as a structure to carry out. According to this configuration, the operating mode of the pressing operation device 1261 can be changed by allowing the player to visually recognize the effect image 1715 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in which the position of the operation surface changes. can be grasped concretely.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, a variable display (ie, , and a variable display capable of producing a predetermined effect by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period. We are trying to make it possible.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to twelfth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the thirteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to twelfth embodiments described above, or may be added from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining amount of the operable period and the state of the pressing operation device 1261 in the variable display configured to enable operation input. More specifically, FIG. 29A is a diagram showing the display contents of the decorative design display device 479 and the state of the pressing operation device 1261 at the start timing of the operable period, and FIG. It is a diagram showing the display contents of the decorative design display device 479 and the state of the pressing operation device 1261 at a predetermined timing within the period, and FIG. 29C is the display of the decorative design display device 479 at the end timing of the operable period. 12A and 12B are diagrams showing the contents and the state of the pressing operation device 1261. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the operable period in the variable display configured to enable operation input, display information 1721 capable of suggesting that it is an operable period and the remaining period of the operable period can be notified. Quantity information 1722 is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 . During this operable period, when the player operates the pressing operation device 1261, an effect corresponding to the success or failure of the special symbol lottery and the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state is executed in synchronization with the operation.

The display information 1721 may be, for example, information including a character string (for example, “PUSH!” The information may also include an image of pressing operation devices corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 (for example, an image in which the pressing operation device corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 is repeatedly pressed). In the example shown in FIG. 29, the display information 1721 is composed of a character string "PUSH!"

The period remaining amount information 1722 may be, for example, a progress bar indicating the decrease in the remaining amount of the operable period with the passage of time, or a numerical value that changes according to changes in the remaining amount of the operable period. good. In the example shown in FIG. 29, display information 1721 and period remaining amount information 1722 are configured by a progress bar.

Specifically, at the start timing of the operable period, the progress bar as the period remaining amount information 1722 indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period is the full amount of the operable period, as shown in FIG. show. After the start of the operable period, the progress bar gradually shortens as shown in FIG. 29B to indicate that the remaining amount of the operable period decreases with the passage of time. Then, at the end timing of the operable period, the progress bar indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period has become zero, as shown in FIG. 29(C).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the period from the start to the end of the operable period, the pressing operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) moves from the neutral position to below the neutral position. It is configured to descend (move) at a substantially constant speed to a predetermined end point position set on the side. Movement control of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940 .

Specifically, at the start timing of the operable period, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 29B, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 gradually descends at a substantially constant speed as the remaining amount of the operable period decreases with the passage of time. Then, at the end timing of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29C, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches a preset end point position.

The sub-control board 940 determines the descending speed of the pressing device 1261 during the operable period by determining the position Q11 of the operation surface of the pressing device 1261 when the operation surface of the pressing device 1261 is at the neutral position and the operation of the pressing device 1261. It is determined based on the distance from the position Q10 of the operation surface when the surface is located at the end position, and the length of the operable period.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the content (mode) of the variable display selected by the sub-control board 940, the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 during the period of the variable display according to the mode. A specific variable display including the possible operable period is provided, and in the specific variable display, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from the start to the end of the operable period under the control of the sub-control board 940. During the period, it is displaced downward from the neutral position. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining time of the operable period through the height position of the operation surface. For example, even when playing a game without visually recognizing the decorative pattern display device 479, the generation of the operable period and the length of the remaining time can be grasped through the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261.例文帳に追加can be done.

Note that the period remaining amount information 1722 does not necessarily have to be displayed, and may be omitted. That is, the player may be made to recognize the length of the remaining time of the operable period only by the height of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 .

Further, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be moved during a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. The control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured so that the surface moves.

In addition, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 protrudes from the peripheral portion, characters (scales) corresponding to time may be put on the protruding portion.

Further, the period from the start to the end of the operable period may include a period in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 gradually rises. Alternatively, it may be configured such that it rises once and then gradually descends, suggesting the operable period depending on the state higher than the initial position.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 30, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 of the fourteenth embodiment is devised so that the player can preferably grasp the remaining time of the variable display being executed.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to thirteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the fourteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to thirteenth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time of the variable display and the state of the pressing operation device 1261. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) is in the neutral position during the period from the start to the end of the variable display. from the neutral position to a predetermined end position set below the neutral position at a substantially constant speed. Movement control of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940 .

Specifically, at the start timing of the variable display, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is positioned at a predetermined neutral position (position Q11). The position gradually descends at a substantially constant speed as the remaining time of the variable display decreases over time. Then, at the end timing of the variable display, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches a preset end point position.

The sub-control board 940 determines the descending speed of the pressing device 1261 during the variable display by determining the position Q11 of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is at the neutral position and the operation of the pressing operation device 1261. It is determined based on the distance from the position Q10 of the operation surface when the surface is located at the end position and the length of the operable period.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the start winning of the special symbol occurs and the variable display is executed, the sub-control board 940 causes the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to change. In accordance with the progress of the variable display during the period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display (variation period), control is executed to gradually displace downward from the neutral position. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with a game feature in which the player can visually recognize the change in the height of the operation surface and can recognize the progress of the variable display by the feeling of touching the operation surface.

In addition, the sub-control board 940 controls the operation surface so that it gradually descends at a substantially constant speed in accordance with the decrease in the remaining time of the variable display over time. , can be easier for the player to understand.

It should be noted that the operation of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descending (moving) at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to the end point position does not necessarily need to be set from the start to the end of the variable display, and the reach state is reached. It may be a later period, or it may be another period such as a period from the start of the variable display to reaching reach.

Further, the advancing speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be substantially constant speed, and may be different speeds depending on the situation. For example, the speed before entering the reach state and the speed after entering the reach state may be different.

Further, the advancing speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be substantially constant speed, and instead or in addition to this, it may include a stepwise advancing section. For example, it may be lowered by a certain amount (eg, 5 mm) every time a certain period of time (eg, 10 seconds) elapses.

Further, the control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be executed by a lottery at the start of the variable display, or the player may perform the variable display effect. , the player may be able to set the function as one of the functions of the pressing operation device 1261 that can be selected.

Further, as a control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the operation surface of the pressing operation device moves upward (moves) from the neutral position to the end position at a substantially constant speed. You may do so.

In addition, as a control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, when a predetermined operation is performed during the above-described non-game state (during standby), a special symbol is started during the game. A pachinko machine 100 constructed so that a decorative pattern display device 479 displays a variable display (variable performance) according to a mode (contents of variable display, variable pattern) selected under the same selection conditions as when a prize is won. For the variable display, the operation surface may operate corresponding to the remaining time of the variable display.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifteenth embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display, the pressing operation is not performed for the time required for the passage of the partial section of the variable display. It is configured to be shorter than the case.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the fifteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of any pachinko machine 100 of the fourteenth embodiment.

FIG. 31 is a time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed during the variable display. More specifically, FIG. 31A is a time chart of variable display when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during variable display, and FIG. 12 is a time chart of a variable display when a pressing operation is performed on 1261;

As shown in FIG. 31A, when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display (that is, when the varying display ends without performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261), time T0 is reached. The variable display started at time T1 ends (fixed display is displayed). In the variable display, content A appears at time T2, content B appears at time T3 after time T2, and content C appears at time T4 after time T3. Examples of the contents A to C include the occurrence of a ready-to-reach state, the execution of effects by the appearance of characters and characters, and the actions of characters (for example, victory or defeat after fighting).

As shown in FIG. 31(B), in the variable display started at time T0, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed at time T2 when content A appears, the sub-control board 940 The progress of the variable display is advanced according to the operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pressing operation is completed.

As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 31B, when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with a predetermined first operation amount (displacement amount or moving speed) during the period from time T2 to time T5. Content B, which appears at time T3 when the pressing operation is not performed, appears at time T5 when the pressing operation ends.

In other words, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed with the first operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5, it is displayed during the period from time T2 to time T3 when the pressing operation is not performed. The contents of the variable display (that is, the series of display contents from content A to content B) are displayed during the period from the start to the end of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, from time T2 to time T5). period) is fast-forwarded (fast-forwarded).

Therefore, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed with the first operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5, the display is performed during the period from time T2 to time T3 when the pressing operation is not performed. Since the content of the variable display progresses in a period shorter than the period (that is, the period from time T2 to time T5), the appearance timing of the content C is also advanced accordingly.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31B, when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 ends at time T5, content C appears at time T6 earlier than time T4. The interval from time T5 to time T6 when content C appears is equal to the interval from time T3 to time T4 (difference between time T4 and time T3).

After content C appears at time T6, at time T7 after a period of time equal to the interval from time T4 to time T1 (difference between time T1 and time T4), the fluctuation result is displayed by stop display, and thereafter, The stop display continues until time T1, and the fixed display is displayed at time T1 (the variable display ends).

As described above, even if part of the variable display is fast-forwarded by the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, the stop display displayed at time T7 is continued until time T1 so that the pressing operation during the variable display can be performed. The variable display period when the operation device 1261 is pressed (that is, the period from the start to the end of the variable display) is the same variation as when the pressing operation is not performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display. Can be a display period.

Therefore, even if part of the variable display is fast-forwarded by the pressing operation on the depressing operation device 1261, the control of the variable display of the symbols by the main control board 920 is not changed. The variable display and the variable display of the design (decorative design) by the sub-control board 940 can be synchronized.

On the other hand, during the period from time T2 to time T5, the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by a predetermined second operation amount different from the first operation amount (for example, a displacement amount larger than the displacement amount corresponding to the first operation amount). , or a moving speed higher than the moving speed corresponding to the first operation amount), content C that appears at time T4 after time T3 when the pressing operation is not performed, It can be made to appear at time T5 when the pressing operation is finished.

As a result, when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed with the second operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5, content A to content A in the variable display is changed during the period from time T2 to time T5. A series of display contents from B to content C is the case where the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the first operation amount in the period from time T2 to time T5 (that is, from time T2 to time T5). A series of display contents from content A to content B are displayed in the period of ), progresses (reproduces) at a faster fast-forward rate than in the case where the display contents are displayed.

Note that when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display, the pressing operation is performed after the progress of the variable display is advanced according to the amount of operation of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pressing operation is completed. is completed, the progress of the variable display may be returned to the timing when the variable display progresses without the pressing operation being performed.

FIG. 32 is a time chart for explaining the configuration, and is a time chart for explaining an example of progress of the variable display when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed during the variable display. More specifically, FIG. 32A is a time chart of variable display when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during variable display, and FIG. 12 is a time chart of a variable display when a pressing operation is performed on 1261;

As shown in FIG. 32A, when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display (that is, when the varying display ends without performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261), time T0 is reached. The variable display started at time T1 ends (fixed display is displayed). In the variable display, content A appears at time T2, content B appears at time T3 after time T2, and content C appears at time T4 after time T3.

As shown in FIG. 32(B), in the variable display started at time T0, when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 at time T2 when the content A appears, the case of FIG. Similarly, the sub control board 940 advances the progress of the variable display according to the operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pressing operation is completed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 32(B), when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is performed with a predetermined first operation amount (displacement amount or moving speed) in the period from time T2 to time T5, Content B, which appears at time T3 when the pressing operation is not performed, appears at time T5 when the pressing operation ends.

As a result, the contents of the variable display displayed during the period from time T2 to time T3 when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, a series of display contents from content A to content B) are changed. , during the period from the start to the end of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the period from time T2 to time T5), progresses in fast-forward (fast-forward playback).

When the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 ends at time T5, as shown in FIG. , is rewound to a position corresponding to time Tm before time T3 in the variable display. Then, the progress of the variable display progresses (reproduces) as usual from time Tm.

Therefore, when the pressing operation with the first operation amount on the pressing operation device 1261 ends at time T5, as shown in FIG. After the content B reappears at T3, the content C appears at time T4, and thereafter, the variable display ends at time T1 in the same manner as when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 (confirmation display is completed). Is displayed).

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated as the control of the variable display executed in the decorative symbol display device 479 by the sub-control board 940, the sub-control board 940 By the control of , the state of the variable display, which ends after a predetermined period of time if the operation is not performed, progresses from the state when the operation is performed according to the amount of operation by the operation. Therefore, when the player wants to proceed with the progress of the variable display, the player can easily proceed to the section he or she wants to proceed with, and thus provides a game property in which the performance that was planned to be viewed later can be viewed in advance. be able to.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the case where the progress of the variable display is advanced according to the amount of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 has been exemplified. ) may be advanced in accordance with the operation amount of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 .

In addition, under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variable display progresses according to the speed and amount of operation from the timing when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated, and the operation is performed. When finished, the progress of the variable display is configured to return to the timing when it progressed without the operation being performed (see FIG. 32). Therefore, while synchronizing the control of the progress of the variable display in the main control board 920 and the control of the progress of the variable display in the sub-control board 940, the variable display is fast-forwarded, and the event that will occur later can be recognized in advance. can be added.

Note that when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated, the state of the event that ends after a predetermined period of time unless the pressing operation device 1261 is operated under the control of the sub-control board 940 is progressed by the operation. The target is a production using a timer with a set remaining time (for example, within 3 minutes, if a reach with a “6” pattern is generated, a big hit will occur). 3, whether or not reach occurs in the next and subsequent variable displays by raising the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to a height corresponding to the remaining time of the command, and pushing the operating surface by the player. may be made visible.

In addition, under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variable display progresses according to the speed and amount of operation from the timing when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated, and the operation is performed. When finished, the progress of the variable display may be configured to return to the timing when the operation was performed. For example, when a predetermined operation is performed during a non-game state (waiting), a mode selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning occurs during a game (contents of variable display, variable pattern), the progress of the variable display may be configured to return to the timing at which the operation was performed, so that some of the effects are performed at high speed. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game progresses only and the player misses it.

Further, as a control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the operation surface of the pressing operation device moves upward (moves) from the neutral position to the end position at a substantially constant speed. Under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variable display returns from the timing when an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 according to the operation speed and operation amount of the operation. A function to be rewound like this may be added. In this case also, after the pressing operation, the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises so as to approach the original state, and as the time progresses, the variable display progresses and restarts. Alternatively, the variable display may be started by returning to the original timing before the operation.

In addition, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may return to the original height position when there is no operation after fast-forwarding and visually recognizing the variable display, or may return to the original height position when there is no operation, or may be set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 times), the fast-forward function may be disabled. The control associated with the operating surface of the device 1261 may end.

Also, when the variable display is fast-forwarded, the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern (for example, the part where the number pattern is displayed) is made to be identifiable without fast-forwarding. For example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the display screen, the variable display is continued without fast forwarding, and at the timing (time Tm) when the original state is restored. The sub-control board 940 may be controlled so as to restore the original size for display.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG. The pachinko machine 100 of the sixteenth embodiment is configured so as to associate multiple levels of height positions of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with effects executed in the variable display.

In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-described first to fifteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the sixteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the above-described first to fifteenth embodiments, or from the above-described first embodiment. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the fifteenth embodiments.

FIGS. 33 and 34 show control in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to a plurality of types displaced from the initial position to different height positions as a trigger for the effect executed in the variable display. It is a figure for explaining.

FIG. 33(A) shows a case where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves up to the height of the position Q1 as the initial position during the variable display, and then moves down by the distance LC to the position Q11, and it moves down by the distance LD. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a situation in which a position Q12 is reached. The displacement from the position Q1 to the downwardly lowered position may be due to the pushing operation of the player, or alternatively or in addition to this, the position is changed by the control of the sub control board 940. It may be one that performs control.

FIGS. 33(B) and 33(C) are diagrams exemplifying situations in which the same effect is started when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced from position Q1 to either position Q11 or position Q12. There is a case where the sub control board 940 decides to execute the same effect in a situation where different starting prizes are generated and another variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), during the variable display, for example, there is a reach state of "7", after which the characters "PUSH!" This indicates that an operation valid period during which the operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is valid has occurred. Here, the display of "PUSH!" may prompt the player to perform an operation by putting his/her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and pushing it. It is also possible to display other expressions such as "Hold it down", to switch between a plurality of expressions every short period of time, or to display a plurality of expressions indicating operation methods at the same time.

The operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to the height of position Q1, and in this situation, when the player presses the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the position corresponds to about half of the section in which the pressing operation is possible. When reaching Q11, an effect of a school of fish is displayed to indicate to the player that the variable display with a high degree of expectation (for example, 50%) for the transition to the special game state is to be executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(C), even in the variable display in which the effect of the school of fish is displayed, the effect of the school of fish may not be displayed even when the operation amount of the pressing operation reaches the position Q11. When the position Q11 is exceeded and the pushing operation is continued to reach the position Q12, a fish school effect may be displayed. The height position at which this effect is executed is selected from a plurality of types as one of the modes of effect for the variable display to be executed. Thus, it is difficult for a player to understand how far the pushing operation should be performed to execute the performance, and the opportunity for executing the same performance is provided with a game property associated with a plurality of types of operation amounts. can be done.

In addition, when the same effect is displayed for the variable display with different amounts of pressing operations, the expectation level for the transition to the special game state due to the occurrence of the effect may be the same level of expectation. , may be different expectations.

In addition, it is not necessary that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced by the player's operation. may be changed. That is, the player is displayed with an effect image prompting the player to put his/her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (for example, the characters "PUT!" are displayed, or a state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface is displayed. The player's hand on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is detected by the electric power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863) and the displacement amount of the encoder, and the operation surface is displayed. , and control to move in the push-in direction with a predetermined operation pattern (for example, constant speed) is performed, and when the position Q11 or Q12 is reached, an effect that has been determined to be executed is performed. good too.

FIG. 34 illustrates a case where different effects are executed depending on the amount of displacement of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from the initial position. FIG. 34(A) shows a case where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves up to the height of the initial position Q1 during the variable display and then moves down by the distance LC to the position Q11, as in FIG. 33(A). 34(B) and 34(C), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves from position Q1 to positions Q11 and Q12. It is the figure which illustrated the situation where the different production|presentation according to each displacement position is started, when it displaces to either.

As shown in FIG. 34(B), during the variable display, for example, there is a reach state of "7", after which the characters "PUSH!" This indicates that an operation valid period during which the operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is valid has occurred. At this time, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to the height of the position Q1. In this situation, when the player pushes the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, when the player reaches the position Q11 corresponding to about half of the section in which the push operation is possible, the character CA13 with a clenched fist appears. , the expectation level of the transition to the special game state is medium (for example, 10%).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34(C), even in the variable display in which the character is displayed, the character may not be displayed yet even if the operation amount of the pressing operation reaches position Q11. When the position Q11 is exceeded and the pressing operation is continued to reach the position Q12, a character CA11 holding a sword may be displayed. This combination of height position and character is selected from a plurality of types as one of the modes of presentation for the variable display to be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game feature that triggers the execution of different modes of presentation depending on the amount of pressing operation performed.

35A and 35B are diagrams for explaining a plurality of types of control when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed and then returned after the operation surface is lowered, as an effect executed in the variable display.

FIG. 35(A) shows a case in which the pressing operation device 1261 becomes operable after a certain amount of operation from the initial position, and the operation feeling becomes lighter and the operation becomes easier after the same certain amount of operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a case where the feeling becomes heavy; In order to control the operational feel, the secondary control board 940 detects the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 using an encoder, and controls the electric power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863) according to the height position. done by

By providing a section having the same operation feeling in a certain section from the initial position, the player can feel as a feeling how much force is required to push the pressing operation device 1261 to operate. . It is preferable to set the interval in which the same operational feeling is equal to or less than half of the total movable range. In addition, it is preferable to provide a case where the operation feeling (strength of reaction force) is high (heavier) and a case where it is low (light) after the section with the same operational feeling. It is possible to make the player recognize that a plurality of types of operation feeling are set in a more comprehensible manner.

After progressing on the operation surface for a certain section, the sub-control board 940 executes control to vary the strength of the operation feeling according to the degree of expectation. FIG. 35A exemplifies a case where the change display with a high degree of expectation causes a heavy change in operational feeling. It is preferable that the frequency of appearance of the variable display with a heavy operational feeling is set lower than that of the variable display with a light operational feeling, thereby reducing the chances of inputting an excessive load to the pressing operation device 1261. . It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the operational feeling heavy when the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation may be suggested to the player by other control. For example, the length of a section with a heavy feeling of operation may be varied, or the pattern of the feeling of operation (the number of heavy sections in a pattern in which heavy sections occur intermittently) may be used to suggest the degree of expectation to the player. good too.

FIG. 35(B) is a diagram illustrating the return position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 after the pressing operation in FIG. 35(A). 2 illustrates the height position (return position) at which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 returns after the operation.

After the pressing operation device 1261 is operated, the height at which the operation surface returns changes according to the degree of expectation. FIG. 35(B) illustrates a case where the return position is higher in the variable display with the higher degree of expectation. It is preferable that the variable display with a high return position is set to appear less frequently than the variable display with a low return position. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to control the return position to be high when the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation may be suggested to the player by other control. For example, when the operation surface moves up and down after the push operation, the number of operations is varied, or the faster the return to the predetermined height position (eg, the initial position), the higher the expectation. You may suggest to the person.

Here, it is not necessary to combine the control of the operation feeling of the pressing operation shown in FIG. 35A and the control of the return position shown in FIG. 35B. In the sub control board 940, only the operation feeling of the pushing operation is different, and the operation after the pushing operation may be controlled in common, or the pushing operation can be performed with the same operation feeling, and the return position after that may be controlled. Alternatively, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be made to protrude from the lowered state without being raised to the initial height position, and the difference in the expectation level may be determined by the height position. It may be suggested to the player that even if the weight of the player's hand changes due to the pressing operation device 1261, by controlling the electric power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863), the height position according to the degree of expectation can be adjusted. The operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be displaced so that .

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player performs a pressing operation on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 which is arranged at the elevated position as the predetermined neutral position, , The sub-control board 940 causes the decorative pattern display device 479 to perform a variable display with a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish), and then, as a result display, when the combination of patterns according to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, A predetermined effect is executed when the operation surface is displaced to different height positions. That is, the sub-control board 940 performs control to produce a predetermined effect when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced from the neutral position to the first position with a small amount of movement, and to control the position of the operated part. 33), and control is executed to produce a predetermined effect when displaced to a second position, which is different from the first position and has moved a lot (see FIG. 33). For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the correspondence relationship between the operation amount and the effect to be executed, and to provide game characteristics in which the trigger for executing the same effect is associated with a plurality of types of operation amounts. can.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be capable of controlling the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to be displaced, and using this displacement control, a variable display accompanied by a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) is executed. In the variable display, a control for displaying a predetermined effect when the operation surface is displaced to a first position with a small amount of movement with respect to the neutral position, and a position of the operation surface to a second position different from the first position. and a control for producing a predetermined effect when displaced (see FIG. 33). In this case, the player recognizes the height position by visually recognizing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or puts his/her hand on the operation surface to feel the change in the height position. It is difficult to understand the corresponding relationship with the trigger of the performance to be performed, and the opportunity to execute the same performance can be provided with the game property associated with the height position of the operation surface of a plurality of types.

Further, the sub-control board 940 controls to produce a predetermined first effect when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced from the neutral position to the first position with a small amount of movement, and controls the operated portion. When the position of is displaced to a second position, which is different from the first position and moved a lot, a second effect different from the predetermined first effect is produced (see FIG. 34). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the playability of anticipating the execution of different effects that are respectively set according to the amount of operation.

Further, the sub control board 940 is configured to be capable of controlling the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to be displaced. A control for displaying a predetermined first effect when displacing to a first position with a small amount of movement, and a control for displaying a predetermined effect when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position. (See FIG. 34). In this case, the player visually recognizes the height position by visually recognizing the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or puts his/her hand on the operation surface to feel the change in the height position, and makes settings according to the amount of operation. It is possible to provide a game property that expects the execution of different presentations.

In addition, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period during which the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated during the variable display period. When a specific variable display is selected and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is operated to move downward by a certain amount during the operable period, the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the certain amount of movement is lightened. Control to make the magnitude of the first magnitude of and control to make the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the movement by a certain amount a second magnitude that is larger than the first magnitude are performed for separate fluctuation displays. Execute. For this reason, the player is allowed to feel in advance how much force is required to press the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to operate the operation surface, and then to experience the degree of operation feeling different from that feeling. It can be easily understood. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize the difference in operational feeling when a plurality of types of operational feeling are provided, and to accurately transmit the information to be conveyed to the player according to the difference in operational feeling such as the change in the degree of expectation. .

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) Modification of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied to the pattern sheet 601, but the configuration according to the first embodiment. may be applied to resin products. For example, a transparent resin plate, a predetermined pattern or pattern-containing layer corresponding to the decorative pattern 621 formed or arranged on one side (back side) of the transparent resin plate, and the transparent resin and a layer corresponding to the decorative part 622 formed or arranged on the other side (surface side) of the plate and on the predetermined pattern or the peripheral edge side of the pattern, according to the first embodiment. The configuration may be a resin product to which the configuration is applied.

In the first embodiment, the decorative portion 622 of the pattern sheet 601 does not overlap the peripheral edge of the decorative pattern 621 when viewed from the front. There may be.

In the first embodiment, in the design sheet 601, the decoration part 622 is formed in almost the entire area except for the area in which the decorative pattern 621 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611. It is not necessary to form the decorative portion 622 in almost the entire area. For example, the configuration may be such that a band-shaped decorative portion 622 is formed along the whole or part of the periphery of the decorative pattern 621 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration in which the pattern sheet 601 has the decorative pattern 621 using the decorative portion 622 has been described. The decorative portion 622 may be used to decorate other patterns such as displays, and the decorative portion 622 may be formed not only from a thin sheet but also from a thick resin part that can be molded by a mold. In addition, the decorative portion 622 is configured using ink that becomes visible when the predetermined situation described in the second embodiment occurs, and when the predetermined situation occurs, the peripheral edge side of the pattern reflects light. It can be configured to make it easier.

In the first embodiment, in the design sheet 601, only the decorative design 621 (main design 621A, sub design 621B) is formed on the back side of the base material 611, but not only the decorative design 621 A coating film may be formed on the back side of the base material 611 including the background of the decorative pattern 621 .

(2) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment In the second embodiment, a pattern (for example, pattern 701, etc.) that becomes visible under a condition where predetermined light such as flash light is applied, and a heating Alternatively, the pattern sheet 601 is provided with a pattern that becomes visible under a heated condition (for example, pattern 721A, etc.), but even if either pattern is provided on the pattern sheet 601 good.

In addition, either a pattern that becomes visible under a condition where a predetermined light such as flash light is applied, or a pattern that becomes visible under a condition where it is heated or heated, and the pattern shown in the third embodiment. The design sheet 601 may be provided with a pattern that can be visually recognized under the condition of being irradiated with a black light. In addition, a pattern that becomes visible under certain conditions such as flash light, a pattern that becomes visible under heated or warmed conditions, and a pattern that becomes visible under conditions where black light is irradiated. A design may be provided on the design sheet 601 .

In the second embodiment, the pattern becomes visible (that is, changes from an invisible state to a visible state) under the condition of being exposed to a predetermined light such as flash light or under the condition of being heated or warmed. is provided on the pattern sheet 601, but under the condition of being exposed to predetermined light such as flash light or under the condition of being heated or heated, the pattern (for example, color or reflectivity) according to the condition may be configured to be visible. For example, a pattern is formed using ink that changes from a first color (e.g., blue) to a second color (e.g., red) when heated or warmed, and under heated or warmed conditions, The configuration may be such that a pattern in a mode (that is, the second color) corresponding to the situation can be visually recognized.

In the second embodiment, the surface side of the base material 611 has a pattern (for example, the pattern 701) that becomes visible under a condition in which predetermined light such as flash light is applied, and a condition in which it is heated or heated. Although the pattern (for example, the pattern 721A) that can be visually recognized below is formed, the pattern may be formed on the back side of the base material 611. FIG. When these patterns are formed on the back side of the base material 611, after the patterns are formed on the back side of the base material 611, the decorative patterns 621 may be formed thereon.

In the second embodiment, the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the pattern sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611. The configuration according to the second embodiment may be applied to the pattern sheet 601 on which the portion 622 is formed. When applying the configuration according to the second embodiment to the pattern sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611, after forming the decorative portion 622 on the surface side of the base material 611, the On the top, a pattern (for example, pattern 701, etc.) that becomes visible under a condition where a predetermined light such as flash light is applied, or a pattern that becomes visible under a heated or heated condition (for example, pattern 721A, etc.) ) may be formed.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where a pattern (for example, the pattern 701, etc.) that becomes visible in a predetermined situation is applied to the pattern sheet 601 has been described. It may be applied to other parts such as decorative parts such as 420, and other parts constituting the front part of the pachinko machine 100 such as at least a part of the opening peripheral edge 211 of the front decoration 210 in the front block 102. may apply. In other words, a pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs may be added as a state changing portion that makes the state of a predetermined surface portion visible in a state that is changed according to the situation. In addition, it is not necessary to directly add to the pattern sheet 601 a pattern (for example, the pattern 701) that becomes visible in a predetermined situation. A pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs may be added to the pattern sheet 601. is molded from transparent resin and placed outside each reel, a pattern 701 or the like is added to the rotating body, and a mechanism for rotating the rotating body by means of a sub-control board 940 is provided. The arrangement position of the pattern 701 or the like may be changed with respect to the pattern displayed on the screen.

(3) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment In the third embodiment, the number corresponding to the number "7" among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 A pattern 741A is provided around the main pattern 621A containing information, and the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2. A pattern 741B is provided on the middle pattern row Z3, and a pattern 741C is provided around the main pattern 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3, thereby , the combination of the specific main symbols 621A can suggest the currently set game mode.

Instead of this, a pattern similar to the pattern 741A or the like is provided around the predetermined sub-symbol 621B provided on each pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, Z3. The combination of the symbols 621B may suggest the currently set game mode.

In the above-described third embodiment, the combination of specific main symbols 621A is configured to suggest the currently set game mode. Predetermined characters, patterns, etc., are formed on the pattern sheet 601 as patterns that can be visually recognized under certain circumstances, and the characters, patterns, etc., corresponding to the set game mode are displayed visually by heating or heating. A configuration that can suggest the set game mode may be adopted.

In the above-described third embodiment, a pattern that is visible under heated or heated conditions is used to suggest the currently set game mode. It is also possible to suggest the currently set game mode by using a pattern that becomes visible under the condition that the light is applied or a pattern that becomes visible under the condition that the black light is applied. Alternatively, a pattern that becomes visible under heated conditions, a pattern that becomes visible under certain conditions such as flash light, or a pattern that becomes visible under black light irradiation Two or three of the patterns may be used to indicate the currently set game mode.

(4) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment In the above-described fourth embodiment, the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is provided along the entire periphery of the decorative lens portion 786 on the peripheral side (outward side). However, if the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is provided on one side of the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is necessarily provided over the entire peripheral edge side of the decorative lens portion 786. For example, it may be provided in a partial section (for example, the lower half) on the peripheral edge side of the decorative lens portion 786 .

In the above-described fourth embodiment, when viewed from the front, the projecting portion 787 is provided between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788. However, the projecting portion 787 is not provided. As a result, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 may be adjacent to each other when viewed from the front.

In the fourth embodiment, the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 are adjacent to each other. There may be a region between the transmissive region X1 and the reflected light transmissive region X2 through which neither the direct light from the light emitter 782 nor the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B passes.

In the fourth embodiment described above, part of the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B of the reflecting component 790 does not enter the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 and is directed outward from the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 (that is, reflected light The specific reflected light does not travel outside the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 (i.e., the player can directly A reflective component 790 may be provided so that the light does not travel as visible light.

In the fourth embodiment, the reflective component 790 is arranged so that a part thereof does not overlap the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 in a front view (that is, arranged so that the non-overlapping region X3 exists). , the reflective component 790 may be arranged so that it all overlaps the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front (that is, arranged so that the non-overlapping region X3 does not exist). Alternatively, the reflective film portion 790B may all be provided so as to overlap the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front.

In the fourth embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 are both light corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782 (direct light or specific reflected light). However, the light passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 corresponds to the light output from a light source different from the light directly passing through the light transmission region X1 (for example, a light source such as a full-color LED similar to the light emitter 782). It may be light. For example, a light emitting means different from the light emitter 782 is placed above the reflecting film portion 790B, at a position where the output light can be reflected by the reflecting film portion 790B and the reflected light can pass through at least the reflected light transmitting region X2. It is good also as a structure provided in.

In the fourth embodiment, after being output from the light emitter 782, the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 and then reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 passes through the reflected light transmission region X2. However, the light reflected by the reflecting film portion 790B of the reflecting component 790 and passing through the outer side of the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 without entering the peripheral edge side decorative portion 788 is reflected by the reflecting film portion 790B. A reflecting portion capable of reflecting toward the reflective portion X2 may be provided, and the light reflected by the reflecting portion may be reflected by the reflecting film portion 790B to enter and pass through the reflected light transmission region X2.

(5) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment In the fifth embodiment, when a predetermined ready-to-win display (specifically, a ready-to-win display consisting of odd numbers) is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 is executable (selectable) with a predetermined probability, in which a character capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state appears, while the reach that cannot appear in the predetermined reach display When a display (specifically, a reach display consisting of an even number) is displayed, it corresponds to (corresponds to) a clipped image including a portion of the character clipped from the moving image data of the first suggestive effect. The configuration in which the second suggestive effect in which the image appears is executable (selectable) with a predetermined probability is exemplified.

Instead of the configuration, or in addition to the configuration, as a suggestive effect that can be executed when a predetermined ready-to-win display (for example, a ready-to-win display consisting of an odd numerical value) is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, a special game state is entered. After the appearance of an image containing a part of a character that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition of the character, the production develops and finally the overall image of the character appears, or an image containing a part of the character Any one of the suggestive effects in which the entire image of the character appears without appearing may be selected according to a selection probability set in advance for each suggestive effect.

In this modified example as well, the moving image data corresponding to the suggestive effect in which the entire image of the character appears without appearing the image including a part of the character is used to suggest the character to be developed in the suggestive effect. Since an image that can be used as an image (that is, an image that includes a part of the character) can be generated, it is possible to reduce the cost of developing an image that suggests the character to be developed, and increase the variations of suggestive effects. .

Also, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, when the unit game right related to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is reserved, a special symbol lottery for the reservation Based on the result, a specific game state (for example, a special game state) that will occur after one or more variable displays are performed is predicted in advance (hereinafter also referred to as "prefetch effect"). , an image including a part of the character that can appear in the variable display to be read ahead and that can suggest the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a specific game state may be displayed. In this modification as well, the video data corresponding to the effect (suggestive effect) in which a character capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a specific game state appears is used, and the image used for the pre-reading effect (that is, the character ) can be generated, so it is possible to increase the variation of effects while suppressing the cost for developing images for pre-reading effects.

In the fifth embodiment, an image generated based on a clipped image from the video data of the first suggestive effect executed during the variable display of the special symbols appears in the second suggestive effect. The image to appear in the second suggestive effect does not necessarily have to be generated based on the moving image data of the effect executed during the variable display of the special symbols like the first suggestive effect. For example, the images that appear in the effects such as the second suggestive effect are the jackpot effect displayed during the special game state, and the so-called demo displayed when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player for a predetermined period of time. It may be a configuration generated based on an image cut out from the moving image data of the effect displayed other than the variable display of the special symbol, such as a moving image on the screen.

In addition, an image generated based on an image cut out from the video data of the first suggestion effect, and an effect displayed other than the variable display of the special symbol, such as a jackpot effect, and an image cut out from the video data of the video The generated image does not necessarily have to appear in the effect executed during the variable display of the special symbols such as the second suggestive effect, for example, it is caused to appear on the demo screen, or in the special effect such as the big win effect. It may be configured to appear in the effect displayed other than the variable display of the pattern.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestive effect, a plurality of clipped images (for example, each portion of the areas AR1, AR2, and AR3 is clipped from one frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect). image) is displayed, the number of images cut out from the image of the frame in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect does not necessarily have to be plural, and may be one.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestive effect, an image corresponding to an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) cut out from one frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect appears. However, the clipped image used for the second suggestive effect does not necessarily have to be an image clipped from one frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect. It may be an image clipped from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestive effect, images corresponding to images cut out from images of different frames may be simultaneously displayed.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestive effect, an image (for example, images 821, 822 , 823) appear, but background data common to the second suggestive effect is prepared regardless of the type of character, and an image including part of the character appears in the background data. good too.

In the fifth embodiment, an image generated based on an image clipped from the video data of the first suggestion effect is displayed in the second suggestion effect, but an image corresponding to the clipped image is prepared in advance. and stored in the sub-control board 940. Even in this modified example, it is possible to easily reduce the need to develop the moving image data used for the second suggestive effect, and to suppress the development cost accordingly.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestive effect, an image corresponding to an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) cut out from one frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect appears. However, the clipped image used for the second suggestive effect does not necessarily have to be an image clipped from one frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect. It may be an image clipped from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestive effect, images corresponding to images cut out from images of different frames may be simultaneously displayed.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestive effect, all of the images (for example, images 821, 822, and 823) corresponding to the images cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect are displayed at the same time. Although it is configured to appear, it is not always necessary to simultaneously appear images corresponding to all cut-out images. For example, a configuration in which one or a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of clipped images are sequentially displayed, or a configuration in which these images are divided into a plurality of groups and each group is sequentially switched and displayed may be used. .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the clipped image is generated from the images of the frames that make up the moving image data of the first suggestive effect. There may be.

In the fifth embodiment, each area to be cut out in the image of the frame constituting the moving image data of the first suggestive effect is located at the same position regardless of the type of character (for example, characters CA1, CA2, and CA3). and are set to have the same size, the position and size of the area to be cut out in the frame image may be different for each type of character.

In the fifth embodiment, the image appearing in the second suggestive effect (the image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state) is 1 in the video data of the first suggestive effect. A case where the images (for example, images 821, 822, and 823) are obtained by processing such as deformation and scaling on the images clipped from the images of the frames of . The image that appears in the second suggestive effect does not necessarily have to be a processed cut-out image, but an unprocessed cut-out image (i.e., an image cut out from one frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestive effect). image). Further, the image appearing in the second suggestive effect may have a configuration in which an unprocessed clipped image and a processed clipped image are mixed.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, deformation and enlargement/reduction of the image are exemplified as the processing applied to the clipped image. It should be noted that, when a clipped image to which a predetermined effect is imparted is displayed in the second suggestive effect, the effect fades over time (that is, the clipped image returns to the original clipped image). may

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestive effect, when a plurality of processed cut-out images (images corresponding to cut-out images) are configured simultaneously in the second suggestive effect, one processed cut-out image and Although the case where another one processed clipped image partially overlaps (for example, a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 overlap) is illustrated, for one processed clipped image, another may be a configuration in which a plurality of processed clipped images are overlapped. Also, at least one of the plurality of processed clipped images may be completely invisible due to overlap with other images.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the character appearing in the first suggestive effect suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state is illustrated, but the content suggested by the character does not necessarily indicate the special game state. It is not necessary to be the degree of expectation for the transition of, but may be the degree of expectation for transition to another game state (eg, probability variation game state, etc.).

In the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 479 as an image display device capable of variably displaying the decorative pattern 1621, which is an image, is configured to display the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed by the reel device, an image display device may be provided separately, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be displayed on the image display device.

(6) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment In the sixth embodiment, the pushing operation device 1261 capable of being pushed downward was illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment. , the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device capable of performing a pressing operation in a direction other than the downward direction. For example, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment can be applied to a pressing operation device capable of performing an upward pressing operation or a pressing operation device capable of performing a pressing operation in a substantially horizontal direction such as the right direction. The position of the operating portion in the horizontal direction may be controlled, or the reaction force to the movement operation to the operating portion may be controlled.

In the sixth embodiment, the button operating portion 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base body 851 via the spring member 853, and the operating mechanism 860 that enables the vertical movement of the button operating portion 850 are provided. Although the pressing operation device 1261 provided with the device is exemplified as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, it is not limited to an input operation device capable of performing a pressing operation, such as the pressing operation device 1261, and an input operation other than a pressing operation is possible. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to such an input operation device.

For example, an input operation device such as a joystick equipped with an operation lever (rod-shaped body) capable of input operation such as pushing or pulling with respect to a predetermined fulcrum, or a dial device capable of rotating around a substantially center axis. A configuration may be employed in which the characteristic configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to the input operation device. In other words, when moved from the initial position in a predetermined direction (for example, the operating direction of the lever centered on the fulcrum or the circumferential direction around the axis), it can be restored to the initial position by the restoring force of the elastic body. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to the input operation device. Further, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to an operation device having an operation unit capable of moving in a plurality of directions (for example, downward movement and rotating operation about the movement direction). may

In the sixth embodiment, the spring member 853 is exemplified by a coil spring, but it is not always necessary to be a coil spring, and a leaf spring or the like may be used. Alternatively, an elastic body (for example, rubber) other than a spring member may be interposed between the base 851 and the operated portion 852 to support the operated portion 852 with respect to the base 851 .

In the sixth embodiment, the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is a component of the button operating portion 850 that can be vertically moved by the operating mechanism 860. Although it is configured to be vertically movable (vibrable) with respect to 851 , an operated portion similar to the operated portion 852 may be provided on the upper end side of the rack 861 of the actuation mechanism 860 . That is, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 may be the stroke amount similar to the stroke amount S2 by the operating mechanism 860 . Even in such a configuration, as in the pressing operation device 1261 in which the operated portion 852 includes the button operating portion 850, the stroke amount caused by the pressing operation can be configured to be variable.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is movable with respect to the base 851 via the spring member 853. However, the spring member 853 is omitted and the operated portion The position and reaction force may be controlled by the operating mechanism 860 in a state in which the 852 and the base 851 are integrated.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is operated through the operation cover member 870. However, the operated portion 852 and the operation cover member 870 are integrated, The player may directly operate the operated portion 852 .

In the above-described sixth embodiment, the button operation portion 850 is vertically moved by the actuation mechanism 860 to generate a reaction force. A mechanism may be used. For example, a cylindrical portion having a central axis along the movement direction is provided on the base of the button operation portion 850, and a spiral groove is formed around the cylindrical portion. is provided so as to be rotatable by a motor 863, and the cylindrical portion is moved up and down by the rotation of the engaging portion, thereby moving the button operation portion 850 in the vertical direction. Alternatively, a reaction force may be generated.

In the sixth embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 (the neutral position of the button operation portion 850) is configured to change according to the number of times of holding unit games related to special symbols. The condition that the neutral position of the device 1261 changes does not necessarily have to be the case where the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol changes. For example, when the number of operations of the pressing operation device 1261 (operated portion 852) reaches a predetermined number of times during a predetermined effect (for example, an effect executed in the variable display of decorative symbols), the pressing operation device 1261 may be configured such that the neutral position of is changed. That is, the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 may be changed according to the number of times the pressing operation device 1261 is operated during a predetermined presentation.

In the sixth embodiment, the detection sensor 854 capable of detecting that the operated portion 852 has reached the maximum pressing position and the detection sensor 854 that detects that the button operating portion 850 has reached the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860 are provided. A detection sensor 890 capable of detection is provided, and the sub control board 840 determines whether or not the pressing operation device 1261 is operated based on detection signals from the detection sensors 854 and 890 .

Alternatively, the lower end of the operated portion 852 and the constantly moving operating cover member 870 can reach the lowest position (that is, the button operating portion 850 is positioned at the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860, Further, a detection sensor capable of detecting the position of the lower end of the operation cover member 870 that can be reached when the operated portion 852 is positioned at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 is provided, and based on the detection signal from the detection sensor. It may be configured to determine whether or not the pressing operation device 1261 is operated.

In the sixth embodiment, the button operating portion 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base body 851 via the spring member 853, and the operating mechanism 860 that enables the vertical movement of the button operating portion 850 are provided. Although the pressing operation device 1261 provided is exemplified as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a accessory device or the like that does not have an operation function. For example, for a role product device including a role product structure part in which a role product is supported by a base via a spring member, and an operating mechanism that enables the vertical movement of the role product structure part, the sixth A configuration according to the embodiment may be applied.

In the sixth embodiment, the surface of the operation cover member 870, the number of times of holding display portion 870A was exemplified, but instead of this, or in addition to this, the right or wrong of the symbol lottery and the special game state It may be possible to display an object whose display is switched depending on the degree of expectation of the transition. For example, if the character "V" is printed under the number "8" of the number of reservations display section 870A, and the button operation section 850 that is raised according to the number of reservations is pressed, the winning is made. If there is a unit game, the operation cover member 870 rises for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) to a position where the character "V" can be visually recognized by the player, and then returns to its original position to win. If there is no unit game to be played, the character "V" may be returned to the original position in a state in which the character "V" cannot be seen.

Further, it is not necessary to change the height position of the button operation unit 850 according to the number of reservations. A button operation part 850 is arranged, and when a player performs a pressing operation in a situation where the right of unit game is reserved and there is a variable display waiting for execution, winning or expectation is high based on the result of lottery. At the height position corresponding to the number of times of the variable display until the variable display is performed (for example, the height position lowered by one scale for the next variable display), the reaction force is increased and the reaction force is generated. Depending on the height position to be played, it may be possible to suggest to the player the execution timing of the variable display that can hold the success or the degree of expectation. It may also be configured to suggest to the player what is going on.

In addition, it is not always necessary to change the height position of the button operation unit 850 according to the number of holds. Based on the result of the winning lottery, the button operation unit 850 rises to one of a plurality of heights (neutral position) set according to the degree of expectation or the degree of expectation, and the reaction force when the button operation unit 850 is pushed. It may be configured to suggest to the player that the larger the size, the higher the degree of anticipation to be executed in the variable display.

(7) Modification of the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 is in the neutral position so that the operation surface 870B is in the vertical direction of the opening R of the case 893 (pressing operation However, when the pressing operation device 1261 is in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is vertically recessed with respect to the opening R of the case 893. It may also be a positioned configuration. In the configuration of this modified example, similarly to the configuration illustrated in the seventh embodiment, the player who performs the pressing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 is given a forceful pressing operation such as hitting the operation surface 870B. Instead, it is possible to perform a pushing operation of carefully pushing the operation surface 870B against the torque (retaining force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 .

In the above seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 for performing a downward pressing operation on the operation surface 870B was exemplified as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment. The characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device similar to the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a pressing operation (for example, forward, left, or right).

That is, for example, in a pressing operation device for performing a pressing operation in the forward direction with respect to the operation surface, the operation surface includes the opening surface of the opening that accommodates the pressing operation device and the front and rear movement direction of the pressing operation device. It is good also as a structure which makes it the position substantially equal to a direction. Further, in such a pressing operation device, the operation surface may be recessed in the front-rear direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening that accommodates the pressing operation device.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 in which the position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment. As the position, a plurality of types of neutral positions including at least a position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction, or a position where the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening R are taken. The characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment may be applied to the pressing operation device 1261 to be obtained.

In the seventh embodiment, as an example in FIG. 24 (FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B)), a part of the player's hand on the wrist side (a part of the hand excluding a part on the finger side) ) and a part of the wrist side of the forearm were exemplified. It is not necessary to have a configuration that can support both the wrist side part of the forearm, and the player can operate the operated part 852 with his/her hand. Any configuration that can support at least a portion of the forearm to be held may be used.

Therefore, for example, the hand rest table 895 may be configured such that only a portion of the player's hand on the wrist side supports the operated portion operably on the finger side of the hand, or the player's forearm portion may be configured to support the operated portion. only a part or all of the forearm may be configured to operably support the operated portion on the finger side of the hand corresponding to the forearm.

In the above seventh embodiment, the hand rest table 895 is in the form of a table having a substantially flat upper surface capable of supporting a part of the player's hand on the wrist side and a part of the forearm on the wrist side from below. However, the form of the hand rest 895 does not necessarily have to be a form of a table having a substantially flat upper surface in the horizontal direction. may be Further, for example, it may be in a substantially U-shaped cuff shape capable of supporting the forearm from below, or may be in a form in which the forearm is hung from above.

In the seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is positioned substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 in the vertical direction, which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261 (the moving direction of the operated portion 852). However, the upper surface of the hand rest table 895 and the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 are positioned above the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893. may be a stepped structure in the vertical direction.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the pressing operation device 1261 capable of performing a downward pressing operation has been exemplified as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment. The input operation device such as a joystick having an operation lever (rod-shaped body) capable of performing the operation, or the input operation device such as a dial device capable of rotating about the center of the input operation device, the characteristic It may be a configuration that applies a configuration.

In other words, for example, for an input operation device such as a joystick or an input operation device such as a dial device, it is a part of the player's hand excluding a part of the finger side that operates the operated part in the input operation device. At least a part of the forearm connected to the hand is provided to the player from the input operation device, such as a hand rest 895 for supporting the operated part by the player's hand. It is good also as a structure provided in the near side.

(8) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment In the eighth embodiment, the customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-game state waiting for the execution of the game by the player is Although a case has been exemplified in which moving images or images are made by diverting moving image data (image data) prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during variable display, it is not necessarily the customer waiting effect. does not need to be composed of moving images or images using moving image data prepared in advance for various effects, and at least part of the customer waiting effect is composed of moving images or images using the moving image data. It may be a configuration. For example, a moving image or image dedicated to the customer waiting effect is prepared, and the customer waiting effect is composed of the moving image or image dedicated to the customer waiting effect and the moving image or image obtained by diverting the moving image data prepared in advance for various effects. It may be a configured configuration.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the customer waiting effect is composed of moving images and images extracted from the suggestive effect, but the moving images and images constituting the customer waiting effect do not necessarily have to be the moving images and images extracted from the suggestive effect. For example, a moving image or an image extracted from an effect (variable effect) other than the suggestive effect displayed during the variable display may be used as part of the customer waiting effect.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-game state, special symbols (first special symbol, second A variable display (variable performance) selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol) starts winning is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, but the variable display is displayed during a non-game state. The trigger to display the variable display does not necessarily have to be an operation (specifically, a pressing operation) on the pressing operation device. It may be configured as follows. For example, during a non-game state, a rotation operation device capable of rotation operation such as the rotation operation device 262 (see FIG. 1) is subjected to a predetermined rotation operation (for example, a rotation operation of one rotation clockwise, or a rotation operation of 200 rpm or more). When the rotation operation by the number of rotations) is performed, the variable display selected under the same selection conditions as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. good too.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the pressing operation to the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-game state, under the same selection condition as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game. Although the selected variable display (variable effect) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, the selection condition of the variable display does not necessarily have to be the same as when the start winning of the special pattern occurs, and it is not a game. When the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the state, the variable display selected under substantially the same selection conditions as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. may

For example, the selection probability of the demonstration pseudo-big hit by the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter provided in the sub control board 940 does not necessarily need to be the same as the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol winning random number counter provided in the main control board 920. Instead, for example, the selection probability of the demonstration pseudo-big hit by the demonstration pseudo-hit random number counter may be higher than the probability of winning the big hit by the winning random number counter related to the special symbols. According to this configuration, the variable display (variable effect) that is displayed only when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery is displayed during the non-game state (more specifically, when the pressing operation to the pressing operation device is performed during the non-game state. If it is done), it can be made easier to appear than during the game. As a result, it is possible to easily appeal the pachinko machine 100 to the players by making the variable performance appear during the non-game state, which is difficult to appear due to the winning probability of the big win during the game. Also, the winning probability of the big win for the variable display executed during the non-game state is assumed to be 100%, and only the variable display (variation performance) executed when the big win occurs is executed during the non-game state. In this case, the pseudo winning random number counter for demonstration may be omitted.

Alternatively, the demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter provided by the sub control board 940, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, or the first demonstration pseudo variation type counter to the fourth demonstration pseudo variation type counter Various selection probabilities However, the main control board 920 has a jackpot symbol random number counter, a stop pattern selection counter, or various selection probabilities in the first to fourth variation type counters may be different.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the pressing operation to the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-game state, under the same selection condition as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game. Although the selected variable display (variation effect) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-game state, it will be displayed during the game. From among the variable displays that can be selected when the start winning of a special symbol occurs, a special selection condition in a non-game state that is different from the selection condition when the start winning of the special symbol occurs (for example, The variation display to be displayed during the non-game state may be selected according to the selection probability of the pseudo jackpot for demonstration by the pseudo winning random number counter.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the pressing operation to the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-game state, under the same selection condition as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs during the game. Although the selected variable display (variable effect) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, regardless of whether it is in the non-game state or during the game, for a predetermined input operation device such as a pressing operation device a period during which a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation) for displaying the variable display can be input, and during this period (a state in which a predetermined operation can be input to the input operation device) When a predetermined operation is performed (inputted) on the operating device or the input operating device, the variable display selected under the same or substantially the same selection conditions as when the start winning of the special symbol occurs is a decorative symbol It may be configured to be displayed on the display device 479 .

(9) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment In the above ninth embodiment, the variation display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state (that is, the pseudo variation display for demonstration) , Four suggestive effects with different expectations for the transition to the special game state according to the display content are displayed simultaneously in the divided display areas 479D to 479G of the decorative pattern display device 479. Alternatively, or in addition to this, two or more display images (for example, Four display images each including a suggestive display 1623 of different types) may be simultaneously displayed in each display area (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) obtained by dividing the decorative pattern display device 479.

In addition, in the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state (that is, the pseudo variable display for demonstration), two or more display images each including the suggestive display 1623 of different types are displayed on the decorative pattern display device. 479 are simultaneously displayed in each divided display area, the period from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-game state until the display image including the suggestive display 1623 appears. , the variable display may be displayed at a higher speed than the period corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbols.

As a result, as described above, the time from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation to the pressing operation device in the non-game state to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the ready-to-win display is changed based on the start winning of the special symbol. As in the case where the time is shorter than the corresponding time in the display, the time from the start to the end of the pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration can be made shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. can.

In the ninth embodiment, a display image including a plurality of suggestive effects with different expectations for the transition to the special game state according to the display content, and expectations for the transition to the special game state according to the shape of the display image. A display image including a plurality of types of pending display 1622 with different degrees was configured to be displayed simultaneously in a plurality of divided display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) of the decorative pattern display device 479.

On the other hand, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, it is not necessary to simultaneously display a display image including multiple types of suggestion effects and a display image including multiple types of pending displays 1622. During the period in which the display image is displayed, the display image is sequentially displayed each time a predetermined operation is performed on an input operation device (for example, the selection operation device 263) different from the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261. It is good also as a structure which switches.

In the ninth embodiment, a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects and a display image including a plurality of types of pending displays 1622 are divided into a plurality of display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative pattern display device 479. ) at the same time, the images (frame images) that make up the variable display like the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbol are displayed all over the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479. It was a configuration that was displayed in a smaller size compared to when it is displayed on the screen.

Instead of this, the display image including the suggestive effect and the display image including the pending display 1622 are displayed one by one, and the image that constitutes the variable display like the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. It may be configured to be displayed in a reduced size compared to the case where it is displayed on the entire display area.

In addition, when there are multiple types of alternative displays 1625, the display images each including the different types of alternative displays 1625 may be displayed simultaneously in each display area obtained by dividing the decorative design display device 479 into a plurality of areas. Also in such a configuration, the display images each including the substitute display 1625 can be displayed in a reduced size as compared with the case of being displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbols.

(10) The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiment. For example, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which, once a big win is made, the expected value of the big win is increased until the big win state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). In addition, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state on the condition that the ball wins in a predetermined area after the big winning symbols are displayed. It may also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko and a mammoth ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as Parrot, which are a combination of pachinko machines and slot machines.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while presenting problems, effects, and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like. Also, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of terms described in other features described with the same wording.

<Feature 10>
a translucent translucent member (substrate 611) having a front surface and a back surface which is a surface opposite to the surface;
a pattern portion provided on the back side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) visible from the front side through the translucent member;
a decoration portion (decoration portion 622) provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member on the surface side of the light-transmitting member, ,
The game machine, wherein the decorative portion is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the color of the pattern.

<Feature 11>
a translucent translucent member (substrate 611) having a front surface and a back surface that is the surface opposite to the surface;
a pattern portion provided on the back side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) visible from the front side through the translucent member;
a decoration portion (decoration portion 622) provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member on the surface side of the light-transmitting member, ,
The decorative portion protrudes toward the surface side from a portion where the design portion is provided on the surface side, and is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the color used to color the design. Characteristic game machine.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine according to feature 10 or feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, a pattern portion including a pattern is provided on the back side of the translucent translucent member. The pattern of the pattern portion can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting member from the surface side of the light-transmitting member. On the other hand, on the surface side of the light-transmitting member, a decorative portion is provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, while the pattern portion is provided on the back side of the translucent member, the decorative portion is provided on the front side of the translucent member, so that the decorative portion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion. As a result, it is possible to improve the feeling of decoration by the decorative portion.

In particular, the decorative portion provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the color of the pattern of the pattern portion. By adding splendor and splendor to the decorative part, it is possible to more suitably improve the feeling of decoration by the decorative part.

To improve the degree of attention to a pattern (the pattern of a pattern portion) provided with the decoration portion on the peripheral edge side by improving the feeling of decoration by the decoration portion, thereby improving the degree of attention to a game machine. can be done.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to feature 11, the "at least a partial color for coloring the pattern" is, for example, a main color for coloring each pattern (for example, a color for coloring the largest area in each pattern). It may be a color that reflects light most easily (for example, a color with the highest lightness), or a color that reflects light most easily among the colors used to color all the patterns. Further, in the gaming machine described in feature 11, the "color configured to easily reflect light" may be defined by the presence or absence of luster, for example, and may be defined by the brightness of the color. There may be.

<Feature 12>
A gaming machine according to feature 10 or feature 11,
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The pattern portion includes a pattern (decorative pattern 621) as the pattern, and a coating film is formed on the back side of the translucent member,
The decorative portion is formed by coating on the surface side of the translucent member,
A gaming machine, wherein the translucent member is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion with the back side on which the pattern portion is formed facing the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion.

In the gaming machine according to feature 12, the translucent member is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion with the back side on which the pattern portion is formed facing toward the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion. By rotating the part, it is possible to perform variable display or stop display (determined display). Since the decorative portion is formed on the surface side of the translucent member, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the variable display and stop display (fixed display) of the pattern.

<Feature 20>
Equipped with a mode changing unit that makes it possible to visually recognize the mode of a predetermined surface portion in a different mode depending on the situation,
The mode changing unit adjusts the color or the display object or the combination of the color and the display object depending on the presence or absence of light (flash) irradiated to the surface portion from the surface side, or the color of the light (black light). A gaming machine characterized in that it can be visually recognized by a player in a form.

<Feature 21>
Equipped with a pattern part provided in a game area where game balls can flow down,
The pattern part is a first pattern (pattern 701, pattern 702, pattern 703) that becomes visible in a predetermined first situation in a manner corresponding to the first situation, and is different from the first situation. and a second pattern (patterns 721A, 721B) that becomes visible in a predetermined second situation in a manner corresponding to the second situation.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 20 or feature 21, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to feature 21, the pattern portion provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down is made visible in a predetermined first situation in a manner corresponding to the first situation. and a second pattern that becomes visible in a predetermined second situation different from the first situation in a manner corresponding to the second situation. Different patterns (first pattern or second pattern) can be visibly displayed in the second situation and the second situation. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine by different patterns that can be visually recognized depending on the situation.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21,
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The pattern portion is formed by coating on one side of the sheet-like translucent member,
The game machine, wherein the light-transmitting member is attached to the reel portion on the back side thereof.

In the gaming machine according to feature 22, the sheet-like translucent member having the pattern part coated on one side is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel part, so that attention to the reel part can be improved. can be done. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which symbols are variably displayed or stopped (determined display) by rotating the reel portion, the first symbol is visibly displayed in the first situation, and the first symbol is visibly displayed in the second situation. By visibly displaying the second pattern, the degree of attention to the reel portion can be favorably increased.

<Feature 23>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 20 to 22,
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is established, the identification information is variably displayed on the display section, and then the identification information (stop pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is displayed in a stationary manner. means (sub control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the variation executing means stop-displays the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal game state. A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state,
Among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined lottery Setting storage means (main control RAM of substrate 920); and input means (rear surface setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
At least one of the first picture and the second picture may vary within a predetermined variation range in the first situation or in the second situation, depending on the situation within the variation range. is made visible in
At least one of the first situation and the second situation is selected so that the design becomes visible in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising situation generating means (sub-control board 940) for generating a situation within the variable range.

In the gaming machine according to feature 23, when the predetermined start condition is established, the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation execution means, and then the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is displayed. The corresponding identification information is statically displayed. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the identification information corresponding to the first result is stop-displayed. do.

The setting storage means stores a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, the probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition is established, the situation generating means causes at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern to become visible in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. , a first situation or a second situation is generated within the variation range of each situation (first situation, second situation).

This corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result will be selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result will be selected in the second lottery. The information to be played can be suggested to the player based on the difference in the aspect of at least one of the first and second symbols. Therefore, the player can add a game feature of estimating the probability information about the gaming machine during play according to the difference in the aspect of at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine, the estimated probability information can be used, it is possible to improve the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature 30>
a first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position;
a second decorative portion (peripheral edge side decorative portion 788) provided on one side with respect to the first decorative portion;
a light-emitting means (light-emitting body 782) provided on the side farther from the player than the second decorative portion and outputting light;
The second decorative portion is
a first transmission portion (direct light transmission region X1) capable of transmitting part of the light output from the light emitting means;
Reflecting means (reflective film portion 790B) capable of reflecting, toward the player side, light that is part of the light output from the light emitting means and returns to the side of the light emitting means without entering the inside of the first transmitting portion; A game machine characterized by comprising:

<Feature 31>
a first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position;
a second decorative portion (peripheral edge side decorative portion 788) provided on one side with respect to the first decorative portion;
Light emitting means (light emitting body 782) provided on the side farther from the player than the second decorative portion and outputting light;
and a reflecting means (reflective film portion 790B) capable of reflecting light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means,
The second decorative portion is
a first transmission portion (direct light transmission region X1) capable of directly transmitting light output from the light emitting means;
A game machine, comprising a second transmission section (reflected light transmission region X2) that is adjacent to or close to the first transmission section and capable of transmitting the light reflected by the reflection means.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 30 or feature 31, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the first decorative portion is provided at a predetermined position, and the second decorative portion is provided on one side of the first decorative portion. The second decorative portion includes a first transparent portion and a second transparent portion adjacent or close to the first transparent portion. The first transmission part is configured to be able to directly transmit the light output from the light emitting means, while the second transmission part is configured to be able to reflect the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means by the reflection means. It is configured to transmit reflected light. Therefore, it is possible to make the appearance of light (for example, brightness, color, etc.) different from that seen by the player between the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion. Thus, in the second decorative portion, the first transparent portion and the second transparent portion can be made to shine differently, so that the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the second decorative portion can be improved.

Also, since the intensity of reflected light is generally lower than the intensity of incident light, the intensity of light transmitted through the second transmission section can be made weaker than the intensity of light transmitted through the first transmission section. . Thereby, in the second decorative portion, it is possible to make it appear that the second transparent portion shines weaker than the first transparent portion. Therefore, since it is possible to change the brightness of the second decorative portion, it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the light passing through the second decorative portion.

As described above, according to the gaming machine described in feature 30 or feature 31, the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the second decorative portion is improved, so that the second decorative portion and the second decorative portion The degree of attention to the first decorative portion provided on the side can be improved, and thereby the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine according to feature 31, the ``light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means'' that can be reflected by the reflecting means is direct light that directly reaches the reflecting means after being output from the light emitting means. Alternatively, the light may be indirect light that is reflected by one or more planes different from the reflecting means after being output from the light emitting means and before reaching the reflecting means.

<Feature 32>
A gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31,
The second transmitting portion is adjacent to or close to the first transmitting portion and is arranged on an end side of the second decorative portion away from the first decorative portion,
The reflecting means is provided below the second transmitting part and reflects the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means upward and away from the first decorative part. A part of the light reflected by the reflecting means is transmitted through the second transmission part, and the other part is not transmitted through the second transmission part and is directly visible by the player outside the second decorative part. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to progress as possible light.

In the gaming machine according to feature 32, the second transparent portion of the second decorative portion is adjacent to or close to the first transparent portion, and is arranged on the end side of the second decorative portion away from the first decorative portion. . Reflecting means provided below the second transmission part reflects light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means upward and away from the first decorative part, A part of the reflected light is transmitted through the second transmission part, and the other part is not transmitted through the second transmission part and travels outside the second decorative part as light that can be directly recognized by the player. configured as follows. The way the player sees the light depends on whether the light reflected by the reflecting means is transmitted through the second transmission section or travels outside the second transmission section as light that can be directly visually recognized by the player. Since (for example, brightness, glitter, etc.) can be changed, the decorativeness of the light reflected by the reflecting means is improved.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 32,
A gaming machine, wherein a part of the reflecting means is exposed outside the second transmitting part without overlapping the second transmitting part when the reflecting means is viewed from the front. .

In the gaming machine according to feature 33, a part of the reflection means is exposed outside the second transmission part without overlapping the second transmission part when the reflection means is viewed from the front. Therefore, on the outer side of the second transmitting portion, the player can receive light that is a mixture of the light reflected by the reflecting means and the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means. can be seen. This makes it possible to give a different impression from the case where the light visible to the player is only the light reflected by the reflecting means from the natural light.

<Feature 34>
A gaming machine according to feature 32 or feature 33,
The light emitting means is provided on the lower side of the second decorative portion and is configured to be capable of outputting light toward the second decorative portion,
The second decorative portion is configured such that when the light output from the light emitting means reaches the second decorative portion, part of the light is transmitted through the first transmitting portion and the other part is reflected toward the reflecting means. A game machine characterized by being played.

In the gaming machine according to feature 34, when the light emitted toward the second decorative portion from the light emitting means provided below the second decorative portion reaches the second decorative portion, A portion of the light is transmitted through the first transmission portion and the other portion is reflected toward the reflection means. can be done. Therefore, the arrangement of the light emitting means can be prevented from becoming complicated, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced by sharing the light emitting means for transmitting light to the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion.

<Feature 35>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features 30 to 34,
The first decorative portion has translucency,
a projecting portion (projecting portion 787) provided along the peripheral edge on the side of the side on which the second decorative portion is provided, on the surface serving as the front side of the first decorative portion;
a decorative member (decorative sheet 789) provided on the back surface side of the first decorative portion, which is the surface opposite to the front surface, and including contents visible from the front surface side through the first decorative portion; prepared,
At least a portion (end surface 787A) of the projecting portion that is visible from the front side is processed so as to appear to have a color that reflects light more easily than at least a portion of the color included in the decorative member. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to feature 35, on the back side of the translucent first decorative portion, the content visible from the front side of the first decorative portion through the first decorative portion is provided. A decorative member is provided comprising: On the other hand, on the surface of the first decorative portion, a protruding portion is provided along the peripheral edge on the side where the second decorative portion is provided. Therefore, while the decorative member is provided on the back side of the first decorative portion, the projecting portion is provided on the front side of the first decorative portion. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the feeling of decoration provided by the projecting portion.

In particular, the projecting portion provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member is processed so as to appear to have a color that reflects light more easily than at least a part of the colors included in the decorative member, so that the projecting portion has a decorative appearance. can be improved more favorably.

<Feature 40>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the result of the lottery before displaying the result of the lottery;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub control board 940) that stores a rendering image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first rendering (first suggestive rendering) as a rendering that can be displayed on the display unit;
Effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit;
Display control means (sub- a control board 940),
The gaming machine, wherein the display control means causes the display section to display an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image in a deformed state or a processed state.

<Feature 41>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the result of the lottery before displaying the result of the lottery;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub control board 940) for storing effect images (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestive effect) among effects that can be displayed on the display unit;
Effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit;
An image of at least one region cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit when a predetermined second effect (second suggestive effect) different from the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means. Display control means (sub control board 940) for displaying on the display unit,
When the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means, the display control means causes the display unit to display the effect image in a state in which the effect image is not deformed or processed in a predetermined state, and When the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means, an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image is displayed on the display section after being subjected to the predetermined deformation or the predetermined processing. A gaming machine characterized by:

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 40 or feature 41, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores an effect image used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means, at least one area cut out from the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit by the display control means. image is displayed on the display section in a state in which it has undergone predetermined deformation or processing. Therefore, since the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit is used in the second effect, the storage amount of the effect image can be suppressed, and the first effect and the second effect can be individually controlled. To easily reduce the need for developing a performance image, and to suppress the development cost accordingly.

In addition, since the image of the area cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in the second effect, an event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed is used in the first effect. A similar suggestion can be made when a second effect using an image clipped from an image is displayed. As a result, for example, when the first effect is an effect that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation, reliability), the degree of ease of transition to the special game state It is possible to suggest the degree also by the display of the second effect. In addition, the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of effects while suppressing the cost for developing the effect images.

Here, in the second effect, since the image of the area cut out from the effect image used in the first effect is displayed, the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It can be difficult to guess. As a result, the degree of difficulty of guessing an event that can be expected after the display of the first effect or the second effect can be made different between when the first effect is displayed and when the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability of guessing an event that can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special game state), thereby improving the playability of the game machine. Attention can be improved.

In particular, since the image of the area cut out from the effect image used in the first effect is displayed in a state of being deformed or processed in the second effect, the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect It is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the effect image of.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 40 or feature 41,
The display control means, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, displays at least a part of images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit as the front view. A game machine characterized in that it is displayed in a deformed or processed state so that it looks facing in substantially the same direction different from the direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature 42, when the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means, the effect image (the effect image used for the first effect) stored in the storage unit is cut out by the display control means. At least a part of the images of the plurality of areas displayed is deformed or processed so as to appear facing in substantially the same direction different from the front direction. This makes it possible to give an orderly impression compared to the case where the images of the plurality of areas are all displayed in different directions.

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to feature 42,
The display control means, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, provides images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit and in a deformed or processed state. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the images of (1) is displayed so as to appear to be superimposed on the other images.

In the gaming machine according to feature 43, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the effect image (the effect image used for the first effect) stored in the storage unit is cut out by the display control means. Since at least one of the images of a plurality of areas that have been transformed or processed is displayed so as to be superimposed on the other images, the content of the superimposed image is displayed to the player. It can be difficult to recognize. In this respect as well, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the effect image corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the playability of estimating an event that can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed (for example, the ease of transition to the special game state). , It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

<Feature 50>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and can display an effect according to the result of the lottery before displaying the result of the lottery;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub control board 940) that stores a rendering image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first rendering (first suggestive rendering) as a rendering that can be displayed on the display unit;
Effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit;
At least one of images corresponding to images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit as an image used for a predetermined second effect (second suggestive effect) different from the first effect A gaming machine comprising display control means (sub-control board 940) for simultaneously displaying a part of the images on the display section.

<Feature 51>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the result of the lottery before displaying the result of the lottery;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub control board 940) for storing effect images (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestive effect) among effects that can be displayed on the display unit;
Effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit;
When a predetermined second effect (second suggestive effect) different from the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means, images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit are displayed. and a display control means (sub-control board 940) for simultaneously displaying at least a part of corresponding images on the display unit.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 50 or feature 51, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores an effect image used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is selected by the effect selecting means, the display control means selects a plurality of areas cut out from the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit. At least a part of the image corresponding to the image is simultaneously displayed on the display unit. Therefore, since the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit is used in the second effect, the storage amount of the effect image can be suppressed, and the first effect and the second effect can be individually controlled. To easily reduce the need for developing a performance image, and to suppress the development cost accordingly.

In addition, since the image corresponding to the image of the area cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in the second effect, the events that can be expected when the first effect is displayed are displayed in the first effect. A similar suggestion can be made when a second effect using an image cut out from the effect image used for the effect is displayed. As a result, for example, when the first effect is an effect that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation, reliability), the degree of ease of transition to the special game state It is possible to suggest the degree also by the display of the second effect. In addition, the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of effects while suppressing the cost for developing the effect images.

Here, in the second effect, an image corresponding to the image of the area cut out from the effect image used in the first effect is displayed, so the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect It is possible to make it difficult to guess the effect image of. As a result, the degree of difficulty of guessing an event that can be expected after the display of the first effect or the second effect can be made different between when the first effect is displayed and when the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability of guessing an event that can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special game state), thereby improving the playability of the game machine. Attention can be improved.

In particular, since at least some of the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of areas cut out from the effect image used for the first effect are displayed at the same time, for example, the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of areas are displayed. It is easier to guess which effect image in the first effect the image displayed in the second effect corresponds to, compared to when one of the images is displayed alone. As a result, it is possible to prevent it from becoming too difficult to guess the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature 51, the ``image corresponding to the images of the plurality of areas cut out from the effect image'' are images that are completely identical in appearance to the images of the plurality of areas cut out from the effect image. It may be an image, it may be substantially the same image, it may be an image that is cut out from the effect image and displayed in the same appearance, and the image that is cut out may be It may be an image that has been deformed or processed.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 50 or feature 51,
The display control means is arranged so that, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, at least one of the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of cut-out areas appears to overlap other images. A game machine characterized by displaying.

In the gaming machine according to feature 52, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the effect image is cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit in association with the first effect by the display control means. Since at least one of the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of areas is displayed so as to be superimposed on the other images, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the superimposed image. can. As a result, it is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect.

<Feature 60>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's operation is provided, and can be arranged at a plurality of neutral positions set in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. In each neutral position, an operating means ( button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870),
The operating means can be held at one of the neutral positions in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the operating means can be moved so that the position of the operating means can be moved without the player's operation on the operated portion. Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for operating,
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operating means so that the position of the operating means can be changed at least;
The game machine, wherein the operation control means includes at least control for moving the operation means at a speed at which an inertial force of a magnitude that deforms the elastic body is generated.

<Feature 61>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) supported by a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and movable in a predetermined direction by operation of a player is provided. The operation means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position when the operation portion is not operated, and when a player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms to move the operated portion to the base body. operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed in the predetermined direction or in the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) movably operable in opposite directions;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 60 or feature 61, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, in the operation means including the operated portion, the operated portion is supported by the base through the elastic body, so that when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms. allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the base.

The operating means is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated by the operating means. Thereby, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the operating means without the player's operation on the operated portion. The actuating means are controlled by the motion control means such that the position of the operating means is at least variable.

Therefore, for example, the operating means is operated by the control by the operation control means, thereby stopping the operating means at a predetermined first position (that is, in a state where the operated portion is not operated), and moving the operating means to the first position. (for example, a neutral position), in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction to a predetermined second position, and then stopped at the second position, it stops at the second position. In the operating means, the operated portion supported by the base via the elastic body can be moved along a predetermined direction by the inertial force received by the operated portion. It is also possible to cause a vibrational motion (reciprocating motion) to reciprocate in the direction opposite to the direction.

Alternatively, for example, when the operating means is operated in a predetermined direction by the player with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means moves from the neutral position to the predetermined direction. and when the operation on the operated part ends after the operating means moves in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by operating the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force In the case of a structure in which the actuator is moved to the neutral position side, the operated means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force is completed, and the operated object is supported by the base via an elastic body. By the inertia force received by the operated portion, it is possible to cause the portion to vibrate (reciprocate) to reciprocate between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As described above, according to the gaming machine described in feature 60 or feature 61, the operating means having the operated portion supported by the base via the elastic body is operated by the operating means controlled by the operation control means. is at least changeable, the inertial force applied to the operated portion of the operating means causes vibration that reciprocates between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. It can be moved (reciprocating motion).

As a result, the operation means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operation means can constitute a part of the presentation, it is possible to increase interest in the operation means, thereby increasing attention to the gaming machine. Also, even with simple movement control of the operating means, the motion of the operated part can be complicated, and the tactile sensation when the player touches the operated part can be changed.

<Feature 62>
The gaming machine according to feature 60 or feature 61,
The operating means moves the operated portion from the neutral position in the predetermined direction when the player operates the operating portion in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding a holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. enabling the movement of the operating means, and performing the operation on the operated part after the operating means moves in the predetermined direction from the neutral position by operating the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force; A game machine characterized by moving the operation means to the neutral position side when the game ends.

In the gaming machine according to feature 62, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is placed in the neutral position. to a predetermined direction, and the operating means is moved from the neutral position in a predetermined direction by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) The operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side when the operation on the operated portion ends later.

Therefore, since the position of the operating means can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operating means, the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated portion due to the player's operation in a predetermined direction from the neutral position is equivalent to the deformation of the elastic body. It is possible to make the amount of movement of the operated part greater than the amount of movement possible by As a result, compared to the case where the amount of movement of the operated part is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the elastic body, it is possible to diversify the sense of operation when the player operates the operated part.

Further, when the action control means is configured to control the operating means such that the holding force can be changed, the force with which the player operates the operated portion can be varied in the region where the operating means is moved by the operating means. Therefore, even in such a case, it is possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated part.

<Feature 70>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a variation execution means (main control board 920) for stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means as a stop symbol after the symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop display by the variation execution means )and,
When the start condition is satisfied while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, a predetermined storage unit (main a RAM of the control board 920), and suspending storage means (main control board 920) for suspending the execution of the variation display corresponding to the information by the variation execution means,
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and the operated portion is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
an operation control means (sub control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that at least one of the position of the operation means and the magnitude of the reaction force to the movement operation of the operation means can be changed,
The operation control means controls the operation of the operation means so as to correspond to at least one of the number of suspension information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of suspension times) and the contents of the suspension information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising at least:

<Feature 71>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a variation execution means (main control board 920) for stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means as a stop symbol after the symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop display by the variation execution means )and,
When the start condition is satisfied while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, a predetermined storage unit (main a RAM of the control board 920), and suspending storage means (main control board 920) for suspending the execution of the variation display corresponding to the information by the variation execution means,
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and the operated portion is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. and is movable from the neutral position to the above-mentioned enabling the movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction, and moving the operating means in the predetermined direction from the neutral position by operating the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force; Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for moving the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the part ends;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operating means so that the position of the operating means can be changed at least;
The operation control means causes the operation means to move to the neutral position predetermined according to the number of the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of suspension times), or A game machine characterized by controlling the actuation means so that the movement mode of the operation means when the operation unit is operated is a mode corresponding to the content of the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 70 or feature 71, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means having the operated portion movable in a predetermined direction by the player's operation is configured to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated portion is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is operated by the operating means, and when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means moves in the predetermined direction from the neutral position. and after the operating means moves in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position), the operated part The operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side when the operation for the is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the operating means without the player's operation on the operated portion. The actuating means are controlled by the motion control means such that the position of the operating means is at least variable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71, when a predetermined start condition is met while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, the holding storage means stores the result of the lottery by the lottery means. is stored in a predetermined storage unit as pending information up to a predetermined number, and execution of the variable display corresponding to the information by the variable execution unit is suspended. Suspension in which the operation means moves to a neutral position predetermined according to the number of suspension information, or the movement mode of the operation means when the operated part is operated by the player is stored in the suspension storage means. The operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to take a mode corresponding to the content of the information.

By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the movement amount (stroke amount) of the operated part by the player's operation in a predetermined direction from the neutral position, thereby improving the operational feeling of the operating means. You can diversify. In addition, by changing the movement mode of the operating means when the player operates the operated portion, it is possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion. By diversifying the operation feeling of the operation means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game machine.

Incidentally, the content of the pending information includes, for example, whether the lottery result is right or wrong, the content of the presentation selected based on the lottery result, and the like.

<Feature 72>
In the gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation. A gaming machine, wherein the operated portion is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body when the portion is operated in the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature 72, since the operated portion of the operating means is supported by the base through the elastic body, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction, the operating means is elastic. It is configured such that the operated portion can be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the base by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after being operated with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operated portion that is supported by the base via the elastic body is Due to the inertia force received by the operated portion, it is possible to cause a vibrational motion (reciprocating motion) to reciprocate between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operation means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form part of the presentation, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature 80>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and the operated portion is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
An operation control means (sub control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least,
The operation control means determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the game situation (e.g., the number of times the game is held, the length of the game, the number of times a predetermined effect (e.g., display of a specific character) is executed) or the result of a predetermined lottery. and controlling the operation of the operation means so that the operation means moves to a neutral position among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions corresponding to the established condition when the operation is performed.

<Feature 81>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and the operated portion is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. and is movable from the neutral position to the above-mentioned enabling the movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction, and moving the operating means in the predetermined direction from the neutral position by operating the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force; Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for moving the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the part ends;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operating means so that the position of the operating means can be changed at least;
The operation control means controls the operating means such that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating means moves to a neutral position among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions according to the satisfied condition. A game machine characterized by

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 80 or feature 81, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means having the operated portion movable in a predetermined direction by the player's operation is configured to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated portion is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is operated by the operating means, and when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means moves in the predetermined direction from the neutral position. and after the operating means moves in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position), the operated part The operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side when the operation for the is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the operating means without the player's operation on the operated portion. The actuating means are controlled by the motion control means such that the position of the operating means is at least variable.

Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the operating means moves to a neutral position among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions according to the satisfied condition. . By changing the neutral position of the operation means, it is possible to change the movement amount (stroke amount) of the operated part by the operation of the player in a predetermined direction from the neutral position, thereby allowing the player to move the operated part It is possible to diversify the operation feeling when operating the . By diversifying the operation feeling of the operation means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game machine.

In addition, as the "predetermined condition" described in the feature 81, for example, when the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol changes, or during a predetermined effect (for example, the effect executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol) It may also be the case that the number of times of operation of the operated part that has been operated has reached a predetermined number of times.

<Feature 82>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80 or feature 81,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation. A gaming machine, wherein the operated portion is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body when the portion is operated in the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature 82, since the operated portion is supported by the base body via the elastic body, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction, the operating means is elastic. It is configured such that the operated portion can be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the base by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after being operated with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operated portion that is supported by the base via the elastic body is Due to the inertia force received by the operated portion, it is possible to cause a vibrational motion (reciprocating motion) to reciprocate between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operation means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form part of the presentation, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature 90>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and the operated portion is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that holds the operating means at the neutral position and enables movement of the operating means from the neutral position in the predetermined direction when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction; ,
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means such that at least one of the position of the operation means and the reaction force to the movement operation of the operation means can be changed;
The action control means controls the actuation means such that when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction, a reaction force to the movement operation of the operation means changes, A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of patterns of change in the reaction force are set in accordance with a predetermined lottery result or degree of expectation.

<Feature 91>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and the operated portion is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. and is movable from the neutral position to the above-mentioned enabling the movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction, and moving the operating means in the predetermined direction from the neutral position by operating the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force; Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for moving the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the part ends;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operating means so that at least the position of the operating means and the holding force can be changed;
When the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the motion control means controls the operation control means at a first position away from the neutral position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the actuation means so as to change a reaction force to a movement operation of the operation means.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 90 or feature 91, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means having the operated portion movable in a predetermined direction by the player's operation is configured to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated portion is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is operated by the operating means, and when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means moves in the predetermined direction from the neutral position. and after the operating means moves in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position), the operated part The operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side when the operation for the is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the operating means without the player's operation on the operated portion. The actuating means are controlled by the motion control means such that the position of the operating means is at least variable.

Here, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the holding force changes at a first position away from the neutral position in a predetermined direction. Actuating means are controlled by motion control means. As a result, when the player operates the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force, the operation feel of the operation means changes at the first position in the middle of the operation, so that the operation feeling of the operation means becomes monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine. For example, as the operation feeling of the operation means, in addition to the control of the operation feeling that resists a certain reaction force to the movement operation of the operation means, by setting the control of the operation feeling that the reaction force changes discontinuously, It is possible to change the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operating means at one position.

<Feature 92>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation. A gaming machine, wherein the operated portion is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body when the portion is operated in the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature 92, since the operated portion of the operating means is supported by the base through the elastic body, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction, the operating means is elastic. It is configured such that the operated portion can be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the base by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after being operated with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operated portion that is supported by the base via the elastic body is Due to the inertia force received by the operated portion, it is possible to cause a vibrational motion (reciprocating motion) to reciprocate between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operation means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form part of the presentation, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature A0>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and is maintained in a predetermined neutral state when the operated portion is not operated. operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the position of the operation means at least so that the position of the operation means can be changed;
A detection means (encoder, sub control board 940) capable of detecting at least one of the movement amount of the operating means and the moving speed of the operated part when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction; ,
A predetermined display when at least one of the movement amount and the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value or reaches a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range. Display a predetermined display on the unit (decorative pattern display device 479), or an operation executing means (sub control board 940) that operates a predetermined movable unit,
A game machine, wherein two or more values corresponding to a result of a predetermined lottery are set as the predetermined target value, the predetermined value, or the value within the predetermined range.

<Feature A1>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation is provided, and the operated portion is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated. means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. and is movable from the neutral position to the above-mentioned enabling the movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction, and moving the operating means in the predetermined direction from the neutral position by operating the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force; Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for moving the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the part ends;
Operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operating means so that the position of the operating means can be changed at least;
Detecting means capable of detecting at least one of the movement amount of the operating means and the moving speed of the operated part when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force ( encoder, sub control board 940),
A predetermined display when at least one of the movement amount and the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value or reaches a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range. and an action executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display on a section (decorative pattern display device 479) or operating a predetermined movable section.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, while various efforts have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines to increase attention to gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to gaming machines. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature A0 or feature A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means having the operated portion movable in a predetermined direction by the player's operation is configured to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated portion is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is operated by the operating means, and when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means moves in the predetermined direction from the neutral position. and after the operating means moves in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position), the operated part The operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side when the operation for the is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the operating means without the player's operation on the operated portion. The actuating means are controlled by the motion control means such that the position of the operating means is at least variable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1, when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the amount of movement of the operating means or the operated part is provided with detection means capable of detecting the moving speed of the When the movement amount or movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, the operation execution means displays a predetermined display on a predetermined display unit, or displays a predetermined display on the predetermined display unit. A movable part is operated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the player operates the operating means in accordance with the predetermined target value, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature A2>
In the gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation. A gaming machine, wherein the operated portion is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body when the portion is operated in the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature A2, since the operated portion of the operating means is supported by the base through the elastic body, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction, the operating means is elastic. It is configured such that the operated portion can be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the base by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after being operated with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operated portion that is supported by the base via the elastic body is Due to the inertia force received by the operated portion, it is possible to cause a vibrational motion (reciprocating motion) to reciprocate between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operation means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form part of the presentation, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature B0>
At least a part of the operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that can be touched by the player and can move in a predetermined direction (downward). is housed in a predetermined opening and attached to the operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means at a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least;
The neutral position of the operating means is a position where the contact surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening (or at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening) in the movement direction of the operating means, or the contact surface is the opening. A game machine characterized by including at least a recessed position in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to a surface (or at least part of the peripheral edge of the opening).

<Feature B1>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a pressing direction (downward) by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface (operating surface 870B) is provided, and the pressing surface is used for playing a game. An operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that is installed in a predetermined opening while facing a person and that is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated part is not pressed. and,
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not pressed, and the position of the operating means is at least opposite to the pressing direction without a player's pressing operation on the operated portion. and when the player performs the pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the pressing is performed from the neutral position. and after the operating means moves from the neutral position in the pressing direction by a pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, the operated portion Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for moving the operating means to the neutral position side when the pressing operation on the part ends;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operating means so that the position of the operating means can be changed at least;
The neutral position of the operating means may be a position where the pressing surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is aligned with the opening surface in the moving direction of the operating means. A gaming machine characterized by including at least a recessed position.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various efforts have been made to the configuration of the conventional gaming machine to raise the level of attention to the gaming machine, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, if it is a game machine according to feature B0 or feature B1, it is possible to provide a game machine that can suitably operate the operation means that the player can touch or the operation means that the player can operate. can be done. For example, an operating means having an operated portion that can move in the pressing direction by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface can be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state in which the operated portion is not pressed. configured to As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not pressed.

In addition, when the operation means presses the operated part in a predetermined direction (more specifically, the pressing direction) with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operation means in the neutral position by the operating means In addition, the operation means is configured to be movable from the neutral position in the direction of the pressing, and the operation means is operated by the pressing operation on the operated part (pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operation means in the neutral position) is moved from the neutral position in the pressing direction, and the operating means moves toward the neutral position when the pressing operation on the operated portion ends.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the pressing direction without the player's pressing operation on the operated portion by the operating means. The actuating means are controlled by the motion control means such that the position of the operating means is at least variable.

Here, in the operating means installed in a predetermined opening with the pressing surface of the operated portion (the surface to be pressed by the player) facing the player, the neutral position of the operating means corresponds to the pressing surface. The configuration includes at least a position where the surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is recessed from the opening surface in the moving direction of the operating means. Therefore, the neutral position of the operating means is a position where the pressing surface of the operated portion is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position recessed from the opening surface in the moving direction of the operating means. In this case, compared to the case where the pressing surface protrudes from the opening surface (more specifically, it protrudes in the direction opposite to the pressing direction), the force of hitting the pressing surface, etc. Certain pressing operations can be made difficult to perform.

As a result, the position where the pressing surface of the operated portion is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening in the movement direction of the operation means, or the position recessed in the movement direction of the operation means with respect to the opening surface is the neutral position of the operation means. By setting the position, the player who operates the operation means (performs a pressing operation on the operated part) is instructed not to perform a vigorous pressing operation such as hitting the pressing surface, but to have a holding force (the operation means is placed in the neutral position). It is possible to perform a pressing operation to press the pressing surface against the holding force.

Therefore, in a game machine provided with an operating means that enables the movement of the operating means in the direction of the pressing from the neutral position when the operated part is pressed with a force exceeding the holding force, the forceful pressing operation Since it is possible to allow the player to preferably experience the operation feeling of pressing, which is difficult to experience due to the force, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine provided with the operating means.

<Feature B2>
In the gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in the pressing direction by a player's pressing operation on the pressing surface, A gaming machine characterized in that, when a player operates the pressing surface in the pressing direction, the operated portion can move in the predetermined direction with respect to the base due to deformation of the elastic body. .

In the gaming machine according to feature B2, since the operated portion is supported by the base via the elastic body, the player can press the pressing surface in a predetermined direction (more specifically, in the pressing direction). ), the deformation of the elastic body allows the operated portion to move in the pressing direction with respect to the base.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the pressing operation on the pressing surface with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the base supported by the base body through the elastic body. The inertial force received by the operated portion allows the operating portion to vibrate (reciprocate) reciprocatingly between the pressing direction and the direction opposite to the pressing direction.

As a result, the operation means can function not only as a means for causing the player to perform a pressing operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form part of the presentation, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature C0>
At least a part of the operating portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that can be touched by the player and can move in a predetermined direction (downward). is housed in a predetermined opening and attached to the operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870);
Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means at a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
Operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least;
Provided on the side closer to the player than the action means, it supports at least a part of a player's hand excluding a part of the finger side contacting the action part and a forearm part connected to the hand. a support part (hand rest 895) provided at a position where the player can touch the action part on the finger side of the supported part with the at least part supported. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

<Feature C1>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by being operated by a player's hand is provided, and a predetermined neutral position is provided when the operated portion is not operated. operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) located in
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. and is movable from the neutral position to the above-mentioned enabling the movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction, and moving the operating means in the predetermined direction from the neutral position by operating the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force; Actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for moving the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the part ends;
Operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operating means so that the position of the operating means can be changed at least;
At least a part of a player's hand, excluding a part of the player's hand on the side of the finger that operates the operated part, and a forearm connected to the hand, is provided closer to the player than the operation means. a supporting part (hand table 895) which is capable of being supported and supports the operated part by a player's hand on the finger side of the supported part in a state where the at least part is supported; A game machine characterized by comprising:

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various efforts have been made to the configuration of the conventional gaming machine to raise the level of attention to the gaming machine, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, if it is a gaming machine according to the feature C0 or the feature C1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate the operation means that the player can touch or the operation means that the player can operate. can be done. For example, an operating means having an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction by being operated by a player's hand is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position by an operating means when the operated portion is not operated. . Thereby, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is operated by the operating means, and when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means moves in the predetermined direction from the neutral position. and after the operating means moves in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position), the operated part The operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side when the operation for the is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the operating means without the player's operation on the operated portion. The actuating means are controlled by the motion control means such that the position of the operating means is at least variable.

Here, on the side closer to the player than the operation means, at least a part of the player's hand excluding the finger side for operating the operated part and the forearm connected to the hand is placed on the player's side. A supporting portion is provided for supporting the operated portion so as to be operable by hand. Therefore, when the player operates the operated part by hand, at least a part of the part of the hand excluding the part of the finger side that operates the operated part and the forearm connected to the hand is supported. Since it can be supported by the part, it is possible to stabilize the hand and prevent the player from operating an inappropriate position on the operated part.

In addition, since at least a part of the player's hand, excluding a part of the finger side that operates the operated part, and the forearm that is continuous with the hand can be supported by the supporting part, the hand and the forearm can be supported. The strength of the operation on the operated part can be suppressed compared to the case where the is moved freely. This makes it difficult for the player who operates the operated part (operates the operation means) to perform a forceful operation (for example, hitting the operated part) on the operated part.

Therefore, in a game machine provided with an operating means that enables movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction from a neutral position when the operated portion is operated in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, Since it is possible for the player to preferably experience the operation feeling of the operation means, which is difficult to experience due to the momentum of certain operations, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game machine provided with the operation means.

In the game machines having features C0 and C1, the “hand” may be a portion on the tip side of the wrist and composed of the palm and fingers, and the “forearm” may be a portion that is continuous with the hand. It may also be the area from the wrist to the elbow.

<Feature C2>
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A transparent light-transmitting member (front plate) is provided on the front side of the game area where the game balls flow down, and partitions the game area from the player so that the player can see the game area from the front side. 222),
The operating means is provided on the front side of the translucent member,
At least part of the support portion is provided on the front side of the operation means,
The length in the front-rear direction of the region on the front side of the translucent member to the length in the front-rear direction from the front end of the operated portion to the rear end of the support portion in the region including the operated portion and the support portion A gaming machine characterized in that the length excluding is shorter than the length of the operated portion in the front-rear direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature C2, the operation means is provided on the front side of the light-transmitting member that partitions between the player and the game area where the game ball flows down, and the support part is at least partly In the configuration provided to be on the front side of the operation means, the front end of the operation means in the area including the operated portion and the support portion of the operation means from the length in the front-rear direction in the area on the front side of the light-transmitting member to the rear end of the support portion is shorter than the length of the operated portion in the front-rear direction. In other words, the region of the operating means including the operated portion and the support portion occupies a relatively large region in the front-rear direction of the region on the front side of the translucent member.

In such a configuration, the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region on the front side of the light-transmitting member (for example, the size that occupies approximately half of the region on the front side in the front-rear direction) size that can be operated with a finger, etc.). In this way, even when the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region on the front side of the translucent member, the support portion is provided so that at least a part of the operated portion is on the front side of the operating means. This makes it possible to suitably operate the operated part (that is, the operated part configured relatively large), and allows the player to preferably experience the operational feeling of operating the operating means provided with the operated part. be able to.

<Feature C3>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation. A gaming machine, wherein the operated portion is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body when the portion is operated in the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature C3, since the operated portion of the operating means is supported by the base through the elastic body, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction, the operating means is elastic. It is configured such that the operated portion can be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the base by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after being operated with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operated portion that is supported by the base via the elastic body is Due to the inertia force received by the operated portion, it is possible to cause a vibrational motion (reciprocating motion) to reciprocate between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operation means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form part of the presentation, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature D1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and can at least display an effect according to the result of the lottery before displaying the result of the lottery;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of effects (variable display, suggestive effect) that can be displayed on the display unit;
Effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of types of effects,
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, and when the effect is selected by the effect selection means, the storage unit before displaying the lottery result. Display control means (sub control board 940) for displaying the effect using the effect image stored in the display unit,
The display control means controls at least one of the plurality of types of effects during a non-game state in which no variable display is performed before the lottery result is displayed. At least one unit image (frame image, still image) that constitutes one or more of the effect images that are respectively used for the effect of the part, or from at least one unit image that constitutes the one or more effect images A game machine characterized in that a non-game image (customer waiting effect) including an image of at least one cut-out area is displayed on the display unit.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature D1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display at least an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage section stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display section.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display unit, and the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means. In this case, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

In addition, during a non-game state in which a player waits for execution of a game, one or a plurality of effects are respectively used for at least part of a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit by the display control means. At least one unit image forming an image, or a non-game image including at least one region image cut out from at least one unit image forming the one or more effect images is displayed. displayed in the

Thus, since the non-game image is displayed in the non-game state waiting for the execution of the game by the player, the player is provided with an effect that can be displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. (More specifically, it is possible to recognize or guess what kind of presentation (at least part of the plurality of types of presentation) is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect displayed on the display unit, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

In particular, the non-game image is configured by using a part of the effect image stored in the storage unit (more specifically, the unit image constituting the effect image or the image of the area cut out from the unit image). Since it is an image, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated image for the non-game image, and the amount of memory for that amount can be reduced, and an effect ( The non-game image can be displayed at the same high resolution as the effect image). Also, since there is no need to prepare a dedicated image for the non-game image, the development cost can be reduced accordingly.

The non-gaming state of the gaming machine described in feature D1 may be a non-gaming state in which a player waits for execution of a game. It may be in a possible operable state.

<Feature E1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and can at least display an effect according to the result of the lottery before displaying the result of the lottery;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of effects (variable display, suggestive effect) that can be displayed on the display unit;
a first effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting, from among the plurality of types of effects, the effect to be displayed on the display unit in response to the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is established;
an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
It is the same as the first effect selection means or the first effect selection means when the player operates the operation unit during the non-game state in which the variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed. A second effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects based on substantially the same selection conditions as
When the predetermined starting condition is established, the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, and when the effect is selected by the first effect selection means, before the result of the lottery is displayed. Display control means (sub control board 940) for displaying the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit,
The display control means causes the display section to display a display corresponding to the result of the lottery when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation section during the non-game state, and the second effect selection means. When the effect is selected by the game, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before displaying the display corresponding to the lottery result. machine.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display at least an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage section stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display section.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the first effect selection means selects the effect to be displayed on the display unit from among a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit in accordance with the lottery results of the lottery means. be. On the other hand, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state waiting for the execution of the game by the player, the second effect selection means selects a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit. , the effect to be displayed on the display section is selected based on the same selection condition as the first effect selecting means or substantially the same as the first effect selecting means.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display unit, and the first effect selection means selects the effect to be displayed on the display unit from a plurality of types of effects. When selected, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state, the display control means displays a display corresponding to the case where the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the predetermined result on the display unit. When the effect displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the second effect selection means, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit corresponds to the result of the lottery. displayed on the display before displaying the display to be performed.

Therefore, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during a non-game state, an effect selected under the same or substantially the same selection condition as when the predetermined start condition is satisfied is displayed. The variable display that appears when the start condition is satisfied can be displayed during the non-game state at the same or substantially the same frequency (probability) as when the start condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can virtually experience the effect displayed when a predetermined starting condition is established during a non-game state at the same or substantially the same frequency as when the starting condition is established. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game effect brought about by the effect displayed when the start condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

The non-gaming state of the gaming machine described in feature E1 may be a non-gaming state in which a player waits for execution of a game. It may be in a possible operable state.

<Feature F1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and can at least display an effect according to the result of the lottery before displaying the result of the lottery;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of effects (variable display, suggestive effect) that can be displayed on the display unit;
Effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting, from among the plurality of types of effects, the effect to be displayed on the display unit in response to the lottery result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
Display control means for displaying an effect selected by the effect selecting means on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, wherein a variable display is performed before the result of the lottery is displayed. Display control means (secondary control means) for displaying an effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-playing state in which the player is not playing substrate 940);
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state, it is executed during the period from when the predetermined starting condition is established until the effect selected by the effect selecting means is finished. an effect non-executing means (sub-control board 940) for not executing a part of the effect to be executed from the time when the predetermined operation is performed until the effect selected by the effect selecting means ends. A gaming machine characterized in that

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature F1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display at least an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage section stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display section.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit by the display control means, and the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means. When the lottery result is displayed, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state in which the player waits for execution of the game, the effect selected by the effect selection means is stored in the storage unit. An effect using the effect image is displayed.

Here, when the player operates the operation unit during the non-game state, one of the functions executed from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means. The part is made non-executable by the effect non-executing means from when the operation part is operated until the effect selected by the effect selecting means is finished.

Therefore, the period from when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-game state to the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (that is, the effect selected by the effect selecting means) and the predetermined start condition. Between the period from establishment to the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (that is, the effect selected by the effect selecting means), part of the effect executed during the latter period is not executed during the former period. Differences in appearance occur at points.

As a result, the effect displayed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-game state is different from the effect displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a special effect is displayed after the end of the effect. Based on this difference, it is possible to allow the player to preferably recognize that the game state is a pseudo performance with no possibility of occurrence.

Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state, the player can, for example, play a special game after the effect displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible in a pseudo presentation, such as the occurrence of a state. As a result, the player misunderstands the effect displayed on the display unit by operating the operation unit during the non-game state, and as a result, the player may not expect the occurrence of a special game state that should not occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of unfavorable situations for

Note that the non-gaming state of the gaming machine described in feature F1 may be a non-gaming state in which a player waits for execution of a game, or instead of describing the non-gaming state, it is possible to perform a predetermined operation on the operation unit. It may be in an operable state.

In addition, instead of the description of the effect non-execution means in the gaming machine described in feature F1, the player presses the operation unit during the non-game state in which the variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed. When a predetermined operation is performed with a predetermined operation, a part of the function to be executed from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means is performed after the predetermined operation is performed. It is good also as a function stop means to stop until the production|presentation selected by the selection means is complete|finished.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature F1, the effect that is not executed by the effect non-executing means may be an effect associated with an input operation of an input means that can be input by the player during the variable display. , or an effect in which an action body (accessory) driven by a drive means such as a motor or a solenoid performs a predetermined action.

<Feature F2>
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means causes the display unit to display the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the symbol, and the first effect selection means. causing the display unit to display the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit before displaying the result of the lottery when the effect is selected;
The effect non-execution means, when the player operates the operation unit during the non-game state, executes the variable display of the symbols, and after the operation unit is operated, the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as described above. A game machine characterized in that it is not executed until it is displayed on a display unit.

With the gaming machine described in feature F2, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit after the pattern variation display, while the player is in the non-game state. operates the operation unit, the effect non-execution means does not execute the variable display of the symbols during the period from when the operation unit is operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. to be executed. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the variable display of the symbols during the period from when the operation unit is operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the player can perform the operation during the non-game state. It is possible to preferably suppress misrecognition of the effect displayed on the display unit by operating the unit.

<Feature F3>
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
an operating member (accessory) operated by a predetermined driving means;
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, an operation control means (sub- a control board 940),
When the player performs the predetermined operation during the non-game state, the effect non-executing means causes the operation of the operation member by the operation control means to correspond to the result of the lottery after the predetermined operation is performed. A game machine characterized in that the game is not executed until the display is displayed on the display unit.

With the gaming machine described in feature F3, when the predetermined starting condition is established, the operation member operates before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, while the game is played during the non-game state. When the user operates the operation unit, the effect non-execution means prevents the operation of the operation member from being operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. It is said that Therefore, the player does not recognize the operation of the operation member during the period from when the operation unit is operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. It is possible to preferably suppress misrecognition of the effect displayed on the display unit by operating the unit.

<Feature G1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
an operation means (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
Display selection means for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operation means during a non-game state in which the variable display is not performed, the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Display selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting a mode,
A display for displaying, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit at a variable time corresponding to the variable display. and a control means (sub control board 940),
The display control means, when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, provides a corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, At least one of a first display (suggestion effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special game state, or a second display that includes a predetermined display (suspension display 1622, suggestion display 1623) that can suggest the degree of expectation a corresponding display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) including the corresponding display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) for a time shorter than the variable time corresponding to the variable display according to the selected mode, on the display unit.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature G1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined starting condition is established, at least a predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode (specific contents) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the display control means displays the variable display selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit at a variable time corresponding to the variable display. be done.

On the other hand, the player operates the operation means during the non-game state (during the non-game state in which the player waits for the execution of the game) in which the variable display executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed is not performed. In this case, the display selecting means selects, as the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, a mode that can be selected when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and which can be selected when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A mode of variable display is selected.

Then, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is generated by the display control means, and the special A first display that can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to the game state (expectation degree indicating the degree of ease of transition to the special game state), or a second display that includes a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation A corresponding display including at least one of is displayed on the display unit for a time shorter than the variable time corresponding to the selected variable display mode.

As a result, the player operates the operation means during the non-game state to display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means, thereby satisfying the predetermined starting condition. What kind of display (predetermined display included in the first display or the second display) that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special game state even if there is no (even if the predetermined start condition is not satisfied)? It is possible to visually confirm whether or not the display is present. Therefore, in the configuration including the first display and the second display, which are displays that can suggest the degree of expectation, the variable display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied, an event that can be expected after the variable display (for example, special The degree of easiness of transition to the game state) can be improved based on the content of the variable display, thereby increasing attention to the gaming machine.

In particular, the corresponding display displayed when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state is displayed on the display unit for a time shorter than the variable time corresponding to the variable display mode selected by the display selection means. Therefore, the display (predetermined display included in the first display or the second display) that can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state can be efficiently viewed within a time shorter than the fluctuation time. can be done.

Note that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature G1 may be a non-gaming state in which the variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed, and the execution of the game by the player may be performed. It may be a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be an operable state in which a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means or a predetermined operation section is possible.

Further, in the gaming machine described in feature G1, "the variable display selected (by the display selection means)" may be from the start to the end of the variable display, or from the start to the end of the variable display. In addition to , it may include the state before or at the time of starting the variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in feature G1, the "corresponding display" may be the variable display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variable display in which a part of the variable display is omitted. good.

<Feature G2>
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
Modes that can be selected by the display selection means include a plurality of modes including at least one of the first display and the second display as a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display. is set and
The display control means controls, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the plurality of types of display effects that can be selected by the display selection means and executed at the same timing. Two or more of the display effects are simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when the variable display is displayed in the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Amusement machine.

With the gaming machine described in feature G2, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, a plurality of different types preset for the variable display mode selected by the display selection means are displayed. A first display as a display effect (a display included in the variable display and capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state) or a second display (a display included in the variable display and the degree of expectation at least one of the display including a predetermined display capable of suggesting the display control means displays a variable display selected by the display selection means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. , are displayed on the display at the same time.

In other words, two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display. , a display (predetermined display included in the first display or the second display) that can suggest two or more expectations that can appear in separate variable displays executed by the establishment of the starting condition multiple times; They can be viewed collectively at the same time. Therefore, since the player can efficiently recognize the difference in display that can suggest two or more expectations during the non-game state, the player can recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation during the game. It is possible to make it easier to play the game while recognizing the difference in the corresponding expectations.

Also, the two or more first displays or the two or more second displays displayed at the same time are displayed in a smaller size than when the variable display selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. Therefore, based on the display size, it is possible for the player to preferably recognize that the first display and the second display are displays in which there is no possibility of occurrence of a special game state after the display. .

<Feature H1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
an operation means (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
Display selection means for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operation means during a non-game state in which the variable display is not performed, the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Display selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting a mode,
a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying, on the display unit, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; ,
The display control means, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, provides a corresponding display (a pseudo-demo and a display corresponding to the lottery result for the corresponding display are displayed on the display unit, and at least part of the corresponding display or at least one of the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. A game characterized in that, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display is displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means or the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed. machine.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature H1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined starting condition is established, at least a predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode (specific contents) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the display control means displays on the display section the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result of the lottery by the lottery means.

On the other hand, the player operates the operation means during the non-game state (during the non-game state in which the player waits for the execution of the game) in which the variable display executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed is not performed. In this case, the display selecting means selects, as the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, a mode that can be selected when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and which can be selected when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A variable display is selected. Then, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the display control means causes a corresponding display constituted by at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, and the corresponding display. A display corresponding to the lottery result for is displayed on the display unit.

As a result, the player can visually recognize at least a part of the variable display that can be displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied as the corresponding display by operating the operation means during the non-game state. Therefore, since at least a part of the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed in the non-game state, the game brought about by the variable display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied The player's interest in sexuality can be improved, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

In particular, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the display control means controls at least part of the corresponding display (at least part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means), or , at least one of the displays corresponding to the results of the lottery is displayed in a smaller size than the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied or the result of the lottery by the lottery means. displayed in the

As a result, a part or all of the corresponding display (at least a part of the variable display) displayed on the display unit after the predetermined operation is performed on the operating means during the non-game state, or the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. , Unlike the variable display and lottery results that are displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, it is a display that does not have the possibility of generating a special game state after the corresponding display is completed or after the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to allow the player to preferably recognize that there is something based on the display size.

Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means during a non-game state, the player generates a special game state after the corresponding display displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation, for example. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible during a non-gaming state, such as playing. As a result, the player misunderstands the corresponding display displayed on the display unit and the display corresponding to the lottery result by operating the operation means during the non-game state, thereby causing a special game state that should not occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of situations that are undesirable for players and game parlor clerks, such as expectations for the occurrence of

Note that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature H1 may be a non-gaming state in which the variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed, and the execution of the game by the player may be performed. It may be a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be an operable state in which a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means or a predetermined operation section is possible.

Further, in the gaming machine according to feature H1, "variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means" may be from the start to the end of the variable display, or from the start to the end of the variable display. In addition to , it may include the state before or at the time of starting the variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in feature H1, the "corresponding display" may be the variable display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variable display in which a part of the variable display is omitted. good.

<Feature H2>
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
As a mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a mode including a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display is set,
The display control means controls, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the plurality of types of display effects that can be selected by the display selection means and executed at the same timing. Two or more of the display effects are simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when the variable display is displayed in the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Amusement machine.

With the gaming machine described in feature H2, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, one of the plurality of types of variable displays prepared in advance for the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed. Two or more corresponding displays corresponding respectively to the two or more variable displays, which are part or all, are displayed, and at least a part of each corresponding display in the two or more corresponding displays to be displayed is subjected to display control. By means of the means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variable display is simultaneously displayed on the display portion in a smaller size than when displaying the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means.

That is, when there are two or more corresponding displays to be displayed, at least a part of each of the two or more corresponding displays can be displayed simultaneously on the display unit. Display effects that can be executed with timing can be collectively visually recognized at the same time.

Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which a variable display including a display effect that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special game state is prepared, the player can operate the operation means during the non-game state to perform at the same timing. It is possible to efficiently recognize the difference between the two or more possible display effects that can suggest the degree of expectation by visually recognizing the variable display after the effect. As a result, the player can easily play the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation during the game.

<Feature H3>
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The display effect is a first display (suggestion effect) that is included in the variable display selected by the display selection means and can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state (suggestion effect), or the display selection means. At least one of a second display including a predetermined display (holding display 1622, suggestive display 1623) that is included in the variable display selected by and can suggest the degree of expectation,
The display control means controls, when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, one of the first display and the second display included in the two or more corresponding displays to be displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of them is simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. .

With the gaming machine described in feature H3, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the first display (to the special game state) included in each of the two or more corresponding displays to be displayed is displayed. At least one of the display that can suggest the degree of expectation for transition) or the second display (display that includes a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state) is displayed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is simultaneously displayed on the display section in a smaller size than when displaying the variable display according to the mode selected by the selection means.

In other words, two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display. , a display (predetermined display included in the first display or the second display) that can suggest two or more expectations that can appear in separate variable displays executed by the establishment of the starting condition multiple times; They can be viewed collectively at the same time. Therefore, since the player can efficiently recognize the difference in display that can suggest two or more expectations during the non-game state, the player can recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation during the game. It is possible to make it easier to play the game while recognizing the difference in the corresponding expectations.

<Feature J1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operated portion is operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operated state;
The operating means can be held at the neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed in the predetermined direction or in the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) movable in opposite directions;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the movement of the position of the operation means by the actuation means;
Display selection means for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operation means located at the neutral position during a non-play state in which the variable display is not performed, the predetermined start condition is satisfied as the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Display selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting a selectable mode when
display control means for causing the display section to display a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means on the display section; When the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the display control means (sub-control board 940 ) and
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the variable display period according to the mode,
The display control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player can control the operated portion during a period in which the operation means can be operated. is operated in the predetermined direction from the neutral position, causing the display unit to display a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variable display,
When the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state and the display selection means selects the specific variable display, the operation control means controls the operation means during a period in which the operation means can be operated. after moving the operated portion in the predetermined direction from the neutral position, moving the operated portion in the opposite direction to the neutral position;
The display control means controls the operated portion by the operation control means when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. is moved in the predetermined direction from the neutral position, the display unit displays a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variable display.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature J1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined starting condition is established, at least a predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode (specific contents) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the display control means displays on the display section the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result of the lottery by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position in a state in which the operated portion is not operated by the operating means. Thereby, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. The operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction under the control of the operating means without the player's operation on the operated portion.

When the player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state (during a non-gaming state waiting for the player to execute a game) in which the variable display executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed is not performed. a variable display mode that can be selected when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied as a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit by the display selection means, and which can be selected when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; is selected. Then, when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state, the display control means displays at least the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means on the display section.

As a result, the player can visually recognize the variable display that can be displayed when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied by operating the operation means during the non-game state. Therefore, since the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed in the non-game state, the player will appreciate the amusement brought about by the variable display that is displayed when the starting condition is satisfied. can improve the interest of the player, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming machine.

Here, the variable display selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display, and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. In the event that the display selecting means selects the specific variable display (when the predetermined start condition is met and the display selecting means selects the specific variable display), the specific variable Predetermined effects prepared by the display control means to appear in the specific variable display when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction from the neutral position during the period during which the operation means in the display can be operated. is displayed on the display.

When a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-game state (the player operates the operation means during the non-game state and the display selection means specifies is selected), after the operated part is moved in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by the operation control means during the period in which the operated part can be operated, the operated part is is moved to the neutral position in the direction opposite to the direction of . Therefore, if a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, during the period in which the operated portion can be operated during the specific variable display, The operating part automatically reciprocates as if operated by the player.

As a result, when a specific variable display is displayed by the player operating the operation means during a non-game state, the operated section can be operated during the specific variable display. It is possible to simulate a situation as if the is operated by the player without actually operating the operated part by the player.

Then, when the operated portion is moved in a predetermined direction from the neutral position by the operation control means, the display control means displays a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variable display on the display portion. . Therefore, when a specific variable display is displayed by the player operating the operation means during a non-game state, the player can operate the operated portion during the period in which the operated portion in the specific variable display is operable. The user can virtually experience what kind of effects appear when the part is operated without actually operating the operated part.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific variable display (variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means) can appear as a variable display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied, the player is in a non-game state. To improve a player's interest in the game characteristics brought about by the specific variable display in which a predetermined effect can be produced by the player's participation, because the player can experience the specific variable display in a simulated manner. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Note that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature J1 may be a non-gaming state in which the variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed, and the execution of the game by the player may be performed. It may be a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be an operable state in which a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means or a predetermined operation section is possible.

<Feature J2>
A gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
The non-game state is ended when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction while the variable display is being displayed based on the player's operation of the operation means during the non-game state. A game machine characterized by comprising non-game state ending means (sub-control board 940).

In the gaming machine described in feature J2, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction during display of the variable display based on the player's operation of the operation means during the non-game state, The non-gaming state is ended by the non-gaming state ending means. Therefore, the variable display displayed during the non-gaming state (variable display displayed based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state) can be changed by the player's operation on the operated means (more specifically, It can be easily terminated by the player's operation of the operated portion in a predetermined direction).

<Feature K1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern A gaming machine comprising a display device 479),
Display control means for performing control to display the predetermined variation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means having a predetermined display condition (starting winning a special symbol, a variable display image including at least part of the variable display displayed when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied when the pressing operation device is pressed during the non-game state; A game machine image (game machine image 1701) corresponding to the game machine whose display image is displayed on the display unit, and a player image (player image 1702) corresponding to the player positioned in front of the game machine. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display on the display unit.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature K1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means controls the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means to match the predetermined fluctuation display and the lottery result by the lottery means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display capable of display.

In the gaming machine, when a predetermined display condition is satisfied, a variable display image including at least a part of a variable display displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the variable A gaming machine image corresponding to the gaming machine whose display image is displayed on the display unit and a player image corresponding to the player positioned in front of the gaming machine are displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the player who plays the game on the gaming machine can see the image of the player playing the game on the gaming machine image displayed on the display unit through the action and appearance of the player, and the image is displayed based on the establishment of the display condition. It is possible to transmit to the player various information such as the player's emotion corresponding to the degree of expectation indicated by the effect shown in the variable display and the operation method for the game machine with respect to the current variable display being performed.

In the gaming machine described in feature K1, in the variable display that is displayed when a predetermined display condition is satisfied, at the end of the variable display, the game machine image or the player image corresponds to at least a part of the result display. It is good also as a structure which performs the display which carries out.

<Feature K2>
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
When displaying the game machine image and the player image on the display unit, the display control means controls at least one of the game machine image and the player image so that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is the predetermined one. A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed to display at least a part of the result differently depending on whether it is the result.

With the gaming machine described in feature K2, when the gaming machine image and the player image are displayed on the display section, at least one of the gaming machine image and the player image is displayed by the lottery means under the control of the display control means. Depending on whether or not the result of the lottery is a predetermined result, at least a part of the result is displayed as being different. Therefore, the result of the lottery by the lottery means can be suggested to the player by at least a partial difference in at least one of the game machine image and the player image.

<Feature K3>
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The display control means does not display the result display at the timing of displaying the result display, and changes the player image to an image corresponding to the result display in the case of the predetermined result (jackpot winning). A gaming machine characterized in that it performs at least control to cause

With the gaming machine described in feature K3, at the timing of displaying the result display, the result display is not displayed by the control of the display control means, and the player image corresponds to the result display when the predetermined result is obtained. image will be changed. Therefore, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result for generating a special game state, the result can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature L1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
Display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied,
The display control means performs first lottery result display control for displaying the result display in a predetermined manner (combination of decorative symbols) when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the variable display is displayed on the display unit. and displaying the result display by the first lottery result display control in a manner (deformation, reduction) different from the predetermined manner when the variable display is displayed on the display unit, or the first result and a second lottery result display control for displaying a predetermined image (alternative display 1625) corresponding to the predetermined result (big hit), which is an image different from the result display by the display control. A game machine characterized by

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature L1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying the result display corresponding to the lottery result. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means controls the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means to match the predetermined fluctuation display and the lottery result by the lottery means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display capable of display.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to be capable of executing first lottery result display control and second lottery result display control. Specifically, according to the first lottery result display control, the result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the variable display is displayed on the display unit. On the other hand, according to the second lottery result display control, when the variable display is displayed on the display unit, the result display by the first lottery result display control is displayed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, or , a predetermined image corresponding to a predetermined result, which is different from the results displayed by the first lottery result display control, is displayed. For this reason, the lottery results displayed by the second lottery result display control differ from the lottery results displayed by the first lottery result display control in terms of display mode or contents. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the lottery result by deforming, reducing, or changing the content of the image. Thereby, when the lottery result is displayed, it is possible to provide the game property of paying attention to the lottery result.

<Feature M1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated part can be changed;
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means is provided during the variable display period according to the mode,
The display control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, controls the operation target and the operation target during the operable period. An image (effect image 1712) that includes a part of the body (left hand 1712B) that is in contact with or in close proximity to the operating means while the part of the body is moving (moving operation to the operated part). A gaming machine characterized by performing control to display on the display unit.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature M1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. In the gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is established and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player can operate the operation means under the control of the display control means. During the possible period, an image containing the operated part of the operating means and a part of the body that is in contact with or close to the operated part, and the part of the body moves while the operating means (moving operation on the operated part) is performed. An image to be operated is displayed on the display unit. For this reason, the content of the displayed image (an image in which a part of the body that is in contact with or close to the operated portion of the operating means moves and operates the operating means) suggests to the player how to operate the operating means. can be done.

<Feature M2>
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
The display control means, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, during the operable period, the operation is performed while the part of the body is moving. A game machine characterized by performing control to display on the display unit an image indicating information related to the operation of the operation means (character information by a character string such as "Continue hitting!") together with an image for operating the means.

In the gaming machine described in feature M2, when a predetermined starting condition is established and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player operates the operation means under the control of the display control means. An image showing information (display information 1713) related to the operation of the operation means is displayed together with an image in which the operation means is operated while a part of the body that is in contact with or close to the operated portion of the operation means is moving during the operable period. Since it is displayed on the display unit, it is possible to suggest to the player how to operate the operating means in an easy-to-understand manner by means of the image showing the information related to the operation of the operating means.

<Feature N1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated part can be changed;
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means is provided during the variable display period according to the mode,
The display control means generates a moving image representing the operation of the operation means during the operable period when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. and the position of the operated portion of the operating means is in a mode of displacement amount different from the displacement amount controlled by the motion control means, or in a mode of reciprocating speed different from the reciprocating speed controlled by the motion control means. A game machine characterized by performing control to display a moving image (effect image 1715) including at least one aspect thereof on the display unit.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature N1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. In the gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is established and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player can operate the operation means under the control of the display control means. A moving image representing the operation of the operation means during the possible period, wherein the position of the operated portion of the operation means is different from the amount of displacement controlled by the operation control means, or the amount of displacement of the operation control means A moving image including at least one aspect of the reciprocating speed different from the controlled reciprocating speed is displayed on the display unit. As a result, the action of the operation means controlled by the action control means can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature N2>
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
The game machine is characterized in that the operation control means performs control to change the position of the operated portion by operating the operation means in a situation in which the moving image is displayed on the display portion.

In the gaming machine according to feature N2, in a situation where a moving image is displayed on the display unit, the operation means operates under the control of the operation control means, thereby changing the position of the operated part. To allow a player to visually recognize a moving image displayed on a moving image displayed on a display unit during operation of the operating means in which the position of the operating unit changes, thereby specifically grasping the operation mode of the operating means. can be done.

<Feature P1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated part can be changed;
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means is provided during the variable display period according to the mode,
The motion control means moves the position of the operated portion from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction during at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. A game machine characterized by performing control to displace.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature P1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. In the game machine, the position of the operated part is controlled by the operation control means, during at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period, from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in the predetermined direction. is configured to be displaced in the direction opposite to the Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining time of the operable period through the position of the operated part (for example, the height position of the operated part). For example, even when playing a game without visually recognizing a display device capable of displaying a variable display, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the operable period and the length of the remaining time through the position of the operated part. be able to.

<Feature Q1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, wherein the position of the operated portion is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (sub control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction,
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
The display control means controls the operation control means to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and controls the operation control means. When the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by, at least a control for making the predetermined effect appear can be executed. .

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature Q1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the game machine, the display control means performs control for displaying a predetermined effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced from a neutral position to a predetermined first position under control of the operation control means, and control of the operation control means. When the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position, control for producing a predetermined effect can be executed at least. For this reason, the player visually recognizes the position of the operated part (for example, the height position) by visually recognizing the operated part of the operating means, or puts the hand on the operated part to determine the position of the operated part. However, it is difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the amount of operation and the trigger of the effect to be executed, and as a result, the trigger to execute the same effect is associated with multiple types of height positions of the operation surface. It is possible to provide a playability.

<Feature R1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed, wherein the position of the operated portion is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (sub control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction,
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
The display control means controls to display a predetermined first effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and the operation control means. When the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of (1), at least a control for producing a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is executable. A game machine characterized by comprising:

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature R1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means performs control for displaying a predetermined first effect when the position of the operated portion is displaced from a neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means; When the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of , at least a control for producing a predetermined second effect different from the first effect can be executed. . For this reason, the player can visually recognize the operated portion of the operation means and recognize the position (for example, the height position) of the operated portion, or place the hand on the operated portion to determine the position of the operated portion. It is possible to provide a game property that expects execution of different performances that are set differently according to the amount of operation while feeling the change in the.

<Feature S1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operated part and the magnitude of the reaction force to the movement operation of the operated part;
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means is provided during the variable display period according to the mode,
The operation control means moves the operated portion in the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount during the operable period when the predetermined start condition is established and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection section. control to set the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the operation after the movement by the predetermined amount to a predetermined first magnitude when the operation is performed; A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least a control to set the second size different from the first size.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature S1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means such that at least one of the position of the operated portion and the magnitude of the reaction force to the movement operation of the operated portion can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. In the game machine, the operation control means moves the operated portion in a predetermined direction by a predetermined amount during an operable period when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. When operated, the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the operated portion has moved the predetermined amount is controlled to a predetermined first magnitude, and the reaction force to the operation after the operated portion has moved the predetermined amount. to a second magnitude different from the first magnitude. For this reason, after having the player experience in advance how much force is required to operate the operated portion of the operation means to operate the operated portion, the player is given an operation feeling different from the feeling. The degree can be made to be easily understood. This makes it easy for the player to recognize the difference in operational feeling when a plurality of types of operational feeling is provided in the operating means, and accurately conveys the information to be conveyed to the player by the difference in the operational feeling such as the change in expectations. can do.

<Feature S2>
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
The specific variable display is configured so that one of a plurality of types of effects can appear when the operation means is operated during the operable period,
The display control means controls the plurality of types of display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the specific variable display, and the operation means is operated during the operable period. At least control for displaying a predetermined first effect out of the effects and control for displaying a second effect different from the first effect are configured to be executable,
The operation control means moves the operated portion in the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount during the operable period when the predetermined start condition is established and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection section. When operated, when the first effect is displayed by the display control means, the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the operation after the movement by the predetermined amount is controlled to be the first magnitude, It is characterized in that, when the second effect is displayed by the display control means, control is performed so that the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the operation after the movement by the predetermined amount becomes the second magnitude. A game machine characterized by

In the gaming machine described in feature S2, the specific variable display is such that one of a plurality of types of effects appears when the operating means is operated during the operable period in which the player can operate the operating means. configured as possible. The display control means, when a predetermined starting condition is established, and when the display selection means selects a specific variable display and the operation means is operated during the operable period, a predetermined number of the plurality of types of effects are displayed. At least control for displaying one effect and control for displaying a second effect different from the first effect are configured to be executable.

In the game machine, the operation control means moves the operated portion in a predetermined direction by a predetermined amount during an operable period when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. When the operation is performed, when the first effect is displayed by the display control means, control is performed so that the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the operated portion moves by a predetermined amount becomes the first magnitude, When the second effect is displayed by the display control means, the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the operated portion has moved by the predetermined amount is controlled to be the second magnitude. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means, it is possible to provide a game feature that expects execution of different effects that are set according to the degree of operational feeling with respect to the operation means.

<Feature T1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (secondary control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated part can be changed according to the progress of the variable display;
The operation control means causes the position of the operated portion to change at least part of a period from the start of the variable display by the display control means to the end of the variable display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed such that the neutral position is gradually displaced in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in accordance with progress of the variable display during a period.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature T1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means controls the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means to match the predetermined fluctuation display and the lottery result by the lottery means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display capable of display.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variable display.

In the gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the position of the operated portion is changed by the control of the operation control means to at least one period from the start of the variable display by the display control means to the end of the variable display. It is gradually displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in accordance with the progress of the variable display during the portion variable period. For this reason, the player can recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing the change in the position of the operated part (for example, the change in height) in the operating means or by the feeling of touching the operated part. can provide sexuality.

<Feature T2>
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the operation control means changes the position of the operated portion from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction according to the progress of the variable display during the variable period. A game machine characterized by performing control to gradually displace at a substantially constant speed to a predetermined end point position.

In the gaming machine described in feature T2, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the position of the operated part is changed during the fluctuation period (from the start of the fluctuation display by the display control means to the relevant position) under the control of the operation control means. At least a part of the period until the end of the variable display), at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to a predetermined direction or a predetermined end position in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, according to the progress of the variable display Displace gradually. For this reason, the player can recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing the change in the position of the operated part (for example, the change in height) of the operating means or by the feeling of touching the operated part. can be provided.

<Feature U1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed;
When the operation means is operated, a predetermined event (progress of variable display, during game a state control means (secondary control board 940) that performs control to advance the state of progress of a predetermined period timed to ) from the state when the operation is performed according to the amount of operation by the operation A gaming machine characterized in that

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the ball entry, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature U1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means controls the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means to match the predetermined fluctuation display and the lottery result by the lottery means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display capable of display.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed.

In the game machine, when the operation means is operated, the state of a predetermined event that ends after a predetermined period of time if the operation is not performed is changed to the state when the operation is performed under the control of the state control means. , to advance according to the amount of operation by the operation. Therefore, when the player wants to proceed with the progress of the variable display, the player can easily proceed to the section he or she wants to proceed with, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize in advance the effect that was planned to be visually recognized later. can be provided.

<Feature V1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (secondary control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated part can be changed according to the progress of the variable display;
The display control means advances the progress of the variable display (playback position) from the timing when the operation means is operated according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation, and performs the operation. A gaming machine characterized in that, when finished, the progress of the variable display is controlled to return to the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation proceeds without performing the operation.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature V1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means controls the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means to match the predetermined fluctuation display and the lottery result by the lottery means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display capable of display.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variable display.

In the gaming machine, under the control of the display control means, the progress of the variable display progresses from the timing when the operation is performed to the operation means according to the speed and amount of operation of the operation. is finished, the progress of the variable display returns to the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation proceeds without the operation being performed. Therefore, the control of the progress of the variable display in the first control board (first control means) and the control of the progress of the variable display in the second control board (second control means) are performed in synchronization. , the variable display can be fast-forwarded while synchronizing the control of the progress of the variable display in each control board, thereby adding a game feature in which an event that will occur later can be recognized in advance.

<Feature W1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed;
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means is provided during the variable display period according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured such that a predetermined effect can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period,
The display control means is configured to operate the operating means during the operable period when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, thereby causing the operated portion to move to the predetermined range. when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation when the position of the operated part is moved in the direction of, and the operation to be operated by the operation and at least a control for making the predetermined effect appear when the position of the unit is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position that is away from the first position in the predetermined direction. Characteristic game machine.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature W1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided, and the specific variable display is , a predetermined effect can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period.

Then, in the gaming machine, the display control means causes the operated part to operate in a predetermined starting condition by operating the operating means during an operable period in which a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selecting means. When the position of the operated part is shifted from a neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation when the position of the operated part is moved in the direction of At least a control for displaying a predetermined effect when displaced from the position to a predetermined second position away from the first position in a predetermined direction is configured to be executable. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence relationship between the operation amount of the operation means and the effect to be executed, and a game property is provided in which the trigger for executing the same effect is associated with a plurality of types of operation amounts. can do.

<Feature X1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on the starting prize, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-game state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operation means that can be operated by a player, and includes an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can move in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means is operated. operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated part at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operating state;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed;
Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing control to display, on the display section, the variation display and the result display according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied; with
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means is provided during the variable display period according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured so that one of a plurality of types of effects can appear when the operation means is operated during the operable period,
The display control means is configured to operate the operating means during the operable period when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, thereby causing the operated portion to move to the predetermined range. When the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation, a predetermined first effect out of the plurality of types of effects is displayed. and the first effect among the plurality of types of effects when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position away from the first position in the predetermined direction by the operation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least a control for causing a different predetermined second effect to appear.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area and a jackpot is won in a lottery performed according to the entered ball, a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state is entered. A configuration for shifting is known (for example, JP-A-2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature X1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, and the display control means controls the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can move in a predetermined direction according to the player's operation. The operating means is configured such that the operated portion can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided, and the specific variable display is , one of a plurality of types of effects can appear when the operation means is operated during the operable period.

Then, in the gaming machine, the display control means causes the operated part to operate in a predetermined starting condition by operating the operating means during an operable period in which a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selecting means. control for displaying a predetermined first effect out of a plurality of types of effects when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation in the case of movement in the direction; When the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position away from the first position in a predetermined direction by the operation, a predetermined second effect different from the first effect among the plurality of types of effects is performed. and control to make it appear. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with a game feeling in which he/she expects execution of different effects that are respectively set according to the amount of operation.

Note that at least one of the features 10 to X1 may be applied in combination with any other feature or a plurality of other features. The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the features described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: a shooting operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the shooting operation means, a passage section for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in a game area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

As described above, the present invention is suitable for game machines such as pinball game machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100... Game machine 479... Decorative pattern display apparatus 611... Base material 621... Decorative pattern 622... Decorative part 701... Design 702... Design 703... Design 721A... Design 721B... Design 741A... Design , 741B... Picture 741C... Picture 905... Back setting switch 907... Initialization switch 920... Main control board 940... Sub control board 782... Light emitting means 786... Decorative lens part 787... Protruding part 787A... End surface 788 Peripheral edge side decorative portion 789 Decorative sheet 790B Reflective film portion X1 Direct light transmission region X2 Reflected light transmission region 850 Button operation portion 851 Substrate 852 Operated portion 853... Spring member, 860... Actuating mechanism, 870... Operation cover member, 870B... Operation surface, 895... Hand table, 222... Front plate, 1622... Reservation display, 1623... Suggestion display, 1625... Alternate display, 1701... Game Machine image 1702 Player image 1712 Effect image 1712B Left hand 1713 Display information 1715 Effect image

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
display control means for performing control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operating means operable by a player, comprising an operated part movable in a predetermined direction by an operation by the player, and the operated part can be arranged at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. and
an operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated portion can be changed according to the progress of the variable display;
The display control means causes the progress of the variable display to proceed from the timing when the operation is performed on the operation means according to the speed and amount of operation of the operation, and when the operation is completed 2. A game machine characterized in that the progress of the variable display is controlled to return to the timing when the operation is performed or the timing when the operation proceeds without performing the operation.